ix20 (2018) - Automotive HYUNDAI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Passenger Car
Model	Hyundai ix20 (2018)
Engine Options	1.4L Petrol, 1.6L Petrol, 1.4L Diesel, 1.6L Diesel
Fuel Type	Unleaded petrol (RON 95/91) or Diesel (EN 590)
Fuel Tank Capacity	50 L (10.9 Imp. gal)
Transmission	Manual (5-speed) or Automatic (6-speed)
Seating Capacity	5
Brake System	Power brakes with ABS, Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Airbag System	Front, side, curtain airbags; passenger ON/OFF switch
Child Restraint	ISOFIX and tether anchor system for rear seats
Steering	Electric power steering
Tyre Pressure (Front/Rear)	2.2 bar (32 psi) for 195/65R15; 2.5 bar (36 psi) for 205/55R16
Recommended Engine Oil	Shell HELIX 5W-30 or 5W-40 (API SL/SM or ACEA A5 for petrol; ACEA C3/C2/B4 for diesel)
Oil Change Interval	Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or as per maintenance schedule
Battery	12V, maintenance-free (typical)
Warranty	Manufacturer's warranty; service at Hyundai authorised repairer
Safety Features	Seatbelt pre-tensioners, child locks, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Frequently Asked Questions - ix20 (2018) HYUNDAI

What type of fuel should I use for my Hyundai ix20 (2018)?

For petrol engines, use unleaded petrol with a Research Octane Number (RON) of 95 or higher (91-94 may be used but will reduce performance). For diesel engines, use commercially available diesel fuel that complies with EN 590 standards. Do not use methanol or fuels containing more than 10% ethanol.

How do I adjust the driver's seat in the ix20?

The driver's seat can be adjusted using the slide lever (forward/backward), the recline knob (seatback angle), and the height lever (up/down). After adjustment, ensure the seat is securely locked by attempting to move it without using the lever. Never adjust the seat while driving.

How do I install a child seat using the ISOFIX system?

Locate the ISOFIX anchors between the rear seat cushion and backrest (marked with the ISOFIX icon). Insert the child seat connectors into the anchors until you hear a 'click'. Then attach the top tether strap to the corresponding anchorage behind the rear seat. Always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

What is the recommended tyre pressure for the Hyundai ix20?

Tyre pressure varies by tyre size. For 195/65R15 tyres: 2.2 bar (32 psi) front and rear. For 205/55R16 tyres: 2.5 bar (36 psi) front and rear. For 205/50R17 tyres: also 2.5 bar (36 psi). Check the tyre pressure label on the driver's side centre pillar for exact specifications.

How does the airbag system work and can I turn off the passenger airbag?

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes front, side, and curtain airbags that deploy in severe collisions. The passenger's front airbag can be deactivated using the ON/OFF switch located on the dashboard. The indicator light shows the status. Always wear seat belts even with airbags.

How do I fold the rear seats for extra cargo space?

First, lower the rear head restraints to their lowest position. Then pull the lock release lever located on the rear seatback and fold the seatback forward firmly. To return, push the seatback backward until it clicks into place. Ensure the seat belt buckles are stowed to prevent damage.

What engine oil should I use and how often should I change it?

For petrol engines, use Shell HELIX 5W-30 or 5W-40 meeting API SL/SM or ACEA A5. For diesel engines, use ACEA C3/C2 (with DPF) or ACEA B4 (without DPF). The oil change interval is every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or as indicated by the maintenance schedule.

How do I jump start the Hyundai ix20?

Connect a jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster battery to the positive terminal of your car. Then connect the negative cable to a metal ground on your car (not the negative battery terminal). Start the booster car, then start your car. Disconnect cables in reverse order. See the manual for complete safety instructions.

How do I use the parking brake?

To engage the parking brake, pull the lever up firmly. To release, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button on the end, and lower the lever. Always apply the parking brake when parking, especially on slopes.

How do I replace a headlight bulb?

The headlight bulbs are H7 55W for both high and low beams (Type A) or 9005HL+ 60W (Type B). To replace, open the bonnet, remove the dust cover, disconnect the wiring, release the retaining clip, and replace the bulb. Avoid touching the glass. Refer to the bulb replacement section in the manual for detailed steps.

USER MANUAL ix20 (2018) HYUNDAI

Line drawing of a car's front and rear view (no text or symbols)

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.

Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for information regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.

Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification without the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification to those installed in production. The electric power assisted steering system is specifically programmed to operate only with the road wheels fitted during production. The installation of alternative specification road wheels may result in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body resulting in tyre damage and compromised safety. The installation of aftermarket wheels on vehicles equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties or malfunction of the TPMS system.

Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels are installed.

TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION

This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled equipment.

It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adversely affect these systems.

Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recommended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE. These titles indicate the following:

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

\*NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

FOREWORD

Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction methods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commitment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equally proud.

This owner's manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained. The recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the continued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.

The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Note : This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of reference.

In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2017 Hyundai Motor Manufacturing Czech s.r.o.. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Manufacturing Czech s.r.o..

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction	1
Your vehicle at a glance	2
Safety features of your vehicle	3
Features of your vehicle	4
Driving your vehicle	5
What to do in an emergency	6
Maintenance	7
Specifications & Consumer information	8
Index	I

Introduction

1

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle run-in process / 1-6

Returning used vehicles (for Europe) / 1-6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This Owners Manual is designed to help vehicle users derive the greatest possible amount of enjoyment and satisfaction from driving the HYUNDAI vehicle. It is strongly recommended that the entire manual is read in order that all of the features, safety systems and maintenance requirements are understood.

To minimise the RISK of death or injury, the "WARNING" and "CAUTION" statements must be read and understood before operating the vehicle.

Illustrations are used throughout the manual to complement written descriptions intended to best explain how to enjoy using the vehicle.

Reading this manual will assist the vehicle user to learn about and understand the features, important safety information, and driving recommendations.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. The index has an alphabetical listing of all the information contained in the manual. The manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents to easily identify at a glance if that section contains the information being sought.

"WARNING", "CAUTION", and "NOTICE" information is provided to enhance the personal safety of the vehicle user. This information must be carefully read and followed.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Petrol engine

Unleaded

For Europe

For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you use unleaded petrol which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)

You may use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of RON 91\~94/AKI 87\~90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle.

Except Europe

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system's oxygen sensor and affect emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for details)

WARNING

- Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Leaded (if equipped)

For some countries, your vehicle is designed to use leaded petrol. When you are going to use leaded petrol, we recommend that you ask a HYUNDAI authorised repairer whether leaded petrol in your vehicle is available or not.

Octane Rating of leaded petrol is same with unleaded one.

Petrol containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and petrol or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded petrol.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.

Other fuels

Using fuels such as;

• Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
• MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,
• Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
• Other metallic additives contained fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate.

\*NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Use of MTBE

Fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should not be used in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapour lock or hard starting.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use unleaded petrol which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).

For customers who do not use good quality petrols including fuel additives regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 10,000 miles (15,000 km).

Additives are available from your HYUNDAI authorised repairer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

Drivers of vehicles which are to be operated in foreign countries must satisfy themselves that:

- The vehicle meets all local regulations with respect to insurance, specifications etc.

- The correct types and grades of fuel are available for satisfactory operation of the vehicle.

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only on commercially available diesel fuel that complies with EN 590 or comparable standard. (EN stands for "European Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as this will increase wear and cause damage to the engine and fuel system. The use of non-approved fuels and / or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer or winter fuel properly according to the following temperature conditions.

- Above -5^ (23°F) ... Summer type diesel fuel.

- Below -5°C (23°F) ...Winter type diesel fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully: If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.

CAUTION

Do not let any petrol or water enter the tank. This would make it necessary to drain it out and to bleed the lines to avoid jamming the injection pump and damaging the engine.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for diesel vehicle equipped with the DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214 or equivalent specifications. (EN stands for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause increased wear or damage to the engine and fuel system. Repair or replacement of worn or damaged components due to the use of non approved fuels will not be covered by the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise, that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.

VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESS

No special run-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.
• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly run-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't tow a trailer/caravan during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.

RETURNING USED VEHICLES (FOR EUROPE)

HYUNDAI promotes an environmentally sound treatment of end of life vehicles and offers to take back your Hyundai end of life vehicles in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.

You can get the detailed information from your national HYUNDAI home page.

Your vehicle at a glance

2

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Inside door handle....4-14
2. Outside rearview mirror folding button* 4-39
3. Outside rearview mirror control switch* 4-38
4. Power window lock switch*......4-22
5. Power window switches*......4-19
6. Bonnet release lever....4-24
7. Fuse box 7-41
8. Steering wheel heater button* .....4-34
9. Parking assist OFF button*......4-64
10. ISG OFF button*......5-15
11. ESC OFF button*......5-33
12. Instrument panel illumination*......4-41
13. Headlight levelling device .....4-75
14. Steering wheel....4-33
15. Steering wheel tilt lever....4-33
16. Seat....3-2
17. Fuel filler lid release lever......4-26
    *: if equipped

OJC025001R

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver's front air bag....3-46

2. Light control/Turn signals .....4-71

3. Instrument cluster....4-40

4. Wiper/Washer....4-76

5. Steering wheel audio controls* .....4-113

6. Auto cruise controls* .....5-38 / Speed limit controls* .....5-43

7. Audio controls*......4-112

8. Digital clock....4-104

9. Hazard warning flasher switch.....4-69

10. Central door lock/unlock switch.....4-14

11. Seat warmer* 3-9

12. Climate control system .....4-82, 4-91

13. Passenger's front air bag ....3-46

14. Glove box 4-102

15. Power outlet*....4-107 / Cigarette lighter*....4-105

16. Shift lever 5-22

17. Parking brake....5-29

*: if equipped

OJC025002R

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Interior view of a car engine bay showing internal components and wiring (no text or labels visible)

1. Engine coolant reservoir....7-13
2. Engine oil filler cap....7-11
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir....7-16
4. Positive battery terminal 6-5
5. Negative battery terminal .....6-5
6. Fuse box....7-41
7. Air cleaner 7-20
8. Radiator cap....7-15
9. Engine oil dipstick....7-11
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-18

* : if equipped

The actual engine room including engine cover in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OJC025003

	Seats / 3-2Seat belts / 3-15Child restraint system / 3-28Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-39Do not install a child restrainton the front passenger's seat / 3-41
	Safety features of your vehicle 3

SEATS

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Driver's seat

(1) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Seat warmer*
(5) Armrest*
(6) Head restraint adjustment

Front passenger seat

(7) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(8) Seatback recliner
(9) Seat warmer*
(10) Head restraint adjustment

Rear seat

(11) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(12) Armrest
(13) Head restraint adjustment
(14) Split folding rear seat
* if equipped

WARNING - Loose objects Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Do not place anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly and be sure there are no other occupants around the seat. If the seatback is returned without being held and controlled, the back of the seat could move forward or backward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck by the seatback.

WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers Riding in a vehicle with seatback reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. The protection of your restraint system (seat belt and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result. The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Do not use a sitting cushion that reduces friction between the seat and passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt can't operate normally.

WARNING - Driver's seat

• Never attempt to adjust seat whilst the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback could result in serious or fatal injury in a sudden stop or collision.
  • Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips. This is the best position to protect you in case of an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary and perhaps severe air bag injuries, always sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel whilst maintaining comfortable control of the vehicle. We recommend that your chest be at least 250 mm (10 inches) away from the steering wheel.

WARNING - Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be securely latched. If not, passengers and objects could be thrown forward resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should be laid flat in the cargo area. If objects are large, heavy, or must be piled, they must be secured. Under no circumstances should cargo be piled higher than the seatbacks. Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the cargo area or sit or lie on folded seatbacks whilst the vehicle is moving. All passengers must be properly seated in seats and restrained properly whilst riding.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• When resetting the seatback to the upright position, make sure it is securely latched by pushing it forward and backwards.
• To avoid the possibility of burns, do not remove the carpet in the cargo area. Emission control devices beneath this floor generate high temperatures.

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place by attempting to move the seat forward or backward without using the lock release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat whilst wearing seat belts. Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that hands or other objects are not caught in the seat mechanisms whilst the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may gush out of the lighter and cause fire.
• Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the centre console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the rear seats, be careful whilst adjusting the front seat position.

Car seat assembly diagram showing left and right views with a highlighted side view (no text or symbols)

Front seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

Interior view of a car seat with side-mounted steering wheel and highlighted flight path diagram (no text or symbols)

Adjusting the seatback recliner

To recline the seatback, rotate the knob forward or rearward to the desired angle.

Car seat diagram showing side view and side profile with arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Seat cushion height (for driver's seat) To change the height of the seat cushion, move the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Armrest (for driver's seat, if equipped) To use the armrest, swing down the arm- rest to the lowest position.

Top-down view of a car showing internal compartments with yellow arrows indicating specific areas (no text or symbols present)

Head restraint

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a head restraint for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps to protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the head restraint should be adjusted so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height of the centre of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the centre of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the head restraint as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the head restraints removed as severe injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Head restraints may provide protection against neck injuries when properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the head restraint position of the driver's seat whilst the vehicle is in motion.

3D rendered robot head with a yellow arrow pointing left, no text or symbols present

Forward and backward (if equipped) The head restraint will be adjusted forward to 3 positions by pulling it forward. To adjust the head restraint backward, pull it fully forward to the foremost position and release it. Adjust the head restraint so that it properly supports the head and neck.

Adjusting the height up and down To raise the head restraint, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the head restraint, push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support and lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

Removal

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the recliner knob (1).
2. Raise head restraint as far as it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release button (3) whilst pulling the head restraint up (4).

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the head restraint removed.

Reinstall

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the holes whilst pressing the release button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recliner knob (3).
3. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

WARNING

Always make sure the head restraint locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

Illustration of a woman seated in a car with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Active head restraint (if equipped)

The active head restraint is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact. This helps to prevent the driver's and front passenger's heads from moving backward and thus helps prevent neck injuries.

WARNING

A gap between the seat and the head restraint release button may appear when seating on the seat or when you push or pull the seat. Be careful not to get your finger, etc. caught in the gap.

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

• Each time you push the button, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

- The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

\*NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and petrol. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers whilst the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.

WARNING - Seat warmer burns

Passengers should use extreme caution when using seat warmers due to the possibility of excess heating or burns. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Interior view of a car showing a closed door and seat area with a book slot (no text or symbols visible)

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

WARNING - Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.

Interior view of a car seat with highlighted seatbelt and yellow directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Rear seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

Interior view of a car backseat with side-mounted seatbelt and yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

The purpose of the fold-down rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects than could not otherwise be accommodated.

Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback whilst the car is moving as this is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a dotted circular annotation highlighting the buckle detail (no text or symbols on the belt itself)

To fold the rear seat

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the rear seat belt in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward and the rear seat rearward.
3. Lower the rear head restraints to lowest position.

3D rendering of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and rear seats with yellow directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the lock release lever and fold the rear seatback forward and down firmly.
2. To use the rear seat, lift the seatback by pulling the lock release lever and push the seatback backward firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place.
3. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after being folded down:

Be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow the seat belt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-back is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. Otherwise, in an accident or sudden stop, the seat could fold down and allow cargo to enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION - Damaging rear seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear seatback or put luggage on the rear seat cushion, insert the buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion. Doing so can prevent the buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback or luggage.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.

WARNING - Cargo Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Special care of objects should be taken when placing them in the rear seats, since those may hit the front seat occupants in a frontal collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading Make sure the engine is off, the automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or the manual transaxle is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the parking brake is applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Top-down view of a car showing three seats and three arrows indicating directions (no text or symbols)

Head restraint

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps to protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the head restraint should be adjusted so the middle of the head restraint is at the same height of the centre of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the centre of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also adjust the head restraint as close to your head as possible. The use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the head restraints removed as severe injury to an occupant may occur in the event of an accident. Head restraints may provide protection against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted.
• When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the head restraint to the lowest position. The rear seat head restraint can reduce the visibility of the rear area.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint, pull it up to the highest position (1). To lower the head restraint, push and hold the release button (2) on the head restraint support and lower the head restraint to the lowest position (3).

Removal

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint poles (3) into the holes whilst pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Interior view of a car backseat with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Armrest (if equipped)

The armrest is located in the centre of the rear seat. Pull the armrest down from the seatback.

WARNING

Make sure the head restraint locks in position after adjusting it for proper protection of the occupants.

SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the car is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he/she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash. The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.
• Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the seat belt can damage it.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.

WARNING

• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly whilst driving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.
  • Make sure there is nothing in the buckle. The seat belt may not be fastened securely.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and navigation controls (no visible text or symbols)

Seat belt warning

Front seat

(1) Driver's seat belt warning light
(2) Front passenger's seat belt warning light

As a reminder to the driver and front passenger, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned ON, the corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 5 mph (9 km/h), the illuminated warning light will start to blink or illuminate until you drive under 3 mph (6 km/h).

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

\*NOTICE

• You can find the front passenger's seat belt warning light on the centre fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warning light will illuminate for 6 seconds.
  • The front passenger's seat belt warning may operate when luggage is placed on the front passenger seat.

WARNING

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the front passenger's seat belt warning system. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

Rear seat

If the ignition switch is turned ON (engine is not running) when the rear passenger's seat belt is not fastened, the corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

And then, the rear corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 35 seconds, if any of the following occurs:

• You start the engine when the rear belt is not fastened.
• You drive over 5 mph (9 km/h) when the rear belt is not fastened.
• The rear belt is disconnected when you driver under 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the rear seat belt is fastened, the warning light will turn off immediately.

If the rear seat belt is disconnected when you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding seat belt warning light will blink for 35 seconds.

But, if the rear passenger's seat belt is/are connected and disconnected twice within 9 seconds after the belt is fastened, the corresponding seat belt warning light will not operate.

Lap/shoulder belt

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

\*NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment (Front seat)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck. You will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) whilst pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING

- Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked into position at the appropriate height. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.

- Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace your seat belts after being in an accident as soon as possible.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and holding a bandage, no text or symbols present

WARNING

You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door.

Illustration of a person using a belt buckle with a yellow arrow indicating the angle (no text or symbols present)

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and rearview door, with two highlighted buttons (no text or symbols visible)

Stowing the rear seat belt

The rear seat belt buckles should be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.

Close-up of a mechanical component with highlighted parts, showing internal structure and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

3 Point rear centre belt (if equipped)

To fasten the rear centre belt

1. Extract the tongue plates from the holes on the belt assembly cover and slowly pull the tongue plates out from the retractor.

1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the open end of the anchor connector (C) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

1. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the tongue plate (B) into the open end of the buckle (D) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

CAUTION - Cargo

Be sure that the cargo is securely loaded in the rear cargo area. Not doing so may damage the rear centre safety belt in sudden stop or certain collisions.

There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

WARNING

When using the rear seat centre belt, you must lock all tongue plates and buckles. If any tongue plate or buckle is not locked, it will increase the risk of injury in the event of collision.

To unfasten the rear centre belt

1. Press the release button on the buckle (D) and remove the tongue plate (B) from the buckle (D).

2. To retract the rear centre seatbelt, insert the key or similar small rigid device into the web release button (C) on the anchor connector. Pull up the seat belt web (A) and allow the webbing to retract automatically.

Close-up of a mechanical component with highlighted parts (A and B), no visible text or symbols

1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the tongue plate pocket (B) and hang the tongue plate to the hook.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and belt (no text or symbols visible)

When using the rear centre seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTRE" mark must be used.

Illustration of a car interior showing two people seated, one driving and the other in a car seat, with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision is severe enough.

WARNING

For your safety, be sure that the belt webbing is not loose or twisted and always sit properly on your seat.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt. (if equipped)

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration:

1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehicle's occupant safety features – including seat belts and air bags – that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly.

\*NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt and the SRS air bag warning light (on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.
• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings not to strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
- If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the vehicle may damage the pre-tensioner seat belt system. Therefore, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Seat belt precautions

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Without a seat belt, occupants could be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle. Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce these hazards. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant seating contained in this manual.

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to "Child restraint system" in this section.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior. Always use a child restraint appropriate for your child's height and weight.

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Safety Standards of your country. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

WARNING - Shoulder belts on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a child's neck or face whilst the vehicle is in motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or serious injury.

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a physician.

WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the fetus is located or above the abdomen where the belt could crush the fetus during an impact.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your risk of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance that an occupant's hips will slide under the lap belt causing serious internal injuries or the occupant's neck could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback has been folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing or buckle could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in serious injury. If the webbing or buckles are damaged, get them replaced immediately.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they should be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. We recommend additional questions concerning seat belt operation be directed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimise the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden manoeuvre. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country.

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX anchors.

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger-side air bag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured or killed by an inflating air bag. All children, even those too large for child restraints, must ride in the rear seat.

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in serious or fatal injuries.
  • Always follow the instructions for installation and use of the child restraint maker.
  • Always make sure the child seat is secured properly in the car and your child is securely restrained in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the car's interior.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child causing serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle – not even for a short time. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in serious injuries to children inside. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any two persons, to use the same seat belt.
• Children often squirm and reposition themselves improperly. Never let a child ride with the shoulder belt under their arm or behind their back. Always properly position and secure children in rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or kneel on the seat or floorboard of a moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child can be violently thrown against the vehicles interior, resulting in serious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very hot, especially when the car is parked in direct sunlight. Always check seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.
  • After an accident, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If there is not enough space to place the child restraint system because of the driver's seat, install the child restraint system in the rear right seat.

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Interior view of a car seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Forward-facing child restraint system

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat, wearing a vest and dark pants (no text or symbols visible)

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system is used in the rear seats.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, because of the danger that an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.

WARNING - Child seat installation

• A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding child restraint system and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could increase the risk and/or severity of injury in an accident.
• If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual), the head restraint of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with straps and belt, no text or symbols present

Installing a child restraint system by lap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or centre rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a person's seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

1. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

Illustration of a person's seatbelt being lifted by a belt, no text or symbols present

1. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.

Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For Europe Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

Mass Group	Seating Position
	Front Passenger	Rear Outboard	Rear Centre
0 :Up to 10 kg(0 - 9 months)	U	U	U
0+: Up to 13 kg(0 - 2 years)	U	U	U
I :9 kg to 18 kg(9 months - 4 years)	U	U	U
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg(4 - 12 years)	U	U	U

U: Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group

WARNING

We recommend that a child restraint seat be installed in the rear seat, even if the front passenger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position. To ensure the safety of your child, the front passenger's air bag must be deactivated when it should be necessary to install a child restraint seat on the front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances.

Interior view of a vehicle cabin with three mechanical components and a hanging load (no visible text or symbols)

Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system Child restraint hook holders are located on the floor behind the rear seats.

Interior view of a car seat assembly (no text or symbols visible)

1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback.
   For vehicles with adjustable head restraint, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. If your vehicle is equipped with a luggage board, set the board to the lowest position.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break, causing serious injury or death.

CAUTION

A Child Restraint System in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the Child Restraint System.

WARNING - Child restraint check

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

Top-down technical drawing of a car showing front, rear, side, and top views with no visible text or symbols

Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system and "Tether Anchorage" system (if equipped)

ISOFIX is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it has vehicle-specific or universal approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R 44.

*ISOFIX: International Standards Organisation FIX

There are ISOFIX labels located on the lower portion of each side of the rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints so equipped.

Interior view of a car seat with highlighted seatbelt points and yellow arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Both rear outboard seats are equipped with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well as a corresponding top tether anchorage on the floor behind the rear seats. The ISOFIX anchorages are located between seat cushion and back rest, marked with the ISOFIX icon.

For installation, CRS ISOFIX connectors have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check potential visual indicators on the CRS and cross-check by pulling).

CRS with universal approval to ECE-R 44 need to be fixed additionally with a top tether strap connected to the corresponding top tether anchorage point in the back rest.

The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installing-manual, which is added to the ISOFIX-seat.

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the ISOFIX anchors. Also make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the ISOFIX anchors.

To secure the child restraint seat:

1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX anchor during the installation.

1. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. (Refer to the previous page.)

WARNING

• Do not install a child restraint seat at the centre of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the centre of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration.
  • Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe

		FixtureSize C	Vehicle ISOFIX positions
			ClassMass Group Front Passenger	Rear Outboard (Driver side)	Rear Outboard (Passenger side)	Rear Centre
Carrycot	F	ISO/L1	-	X	X	-
	G	ISO/L2	-	X	X	-
0:UP to 10kg	E	ISO/R1	-	IUF	IUF	-
0+:UP to 13kg	E	ISO/R1	-	IUF	IUF	-
	D	ISO/R2	-	IUF	IUF	-
	C	ISO/R3	-	IUF	IUF	-
1:9 to 18kg	D	ISO/R2	-	IUF	IUF	-
	C	ISO/R3	-	IUF	IUF	-
	B	ISO/F2	-	IUF	IUF	-
	B1	ISO/F2X	-	IUF	IUF
	A	ISO/F3	-	IUF	IUF	-

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe

Mass Group Name	Manufacturer Type of Fixation			ECE-R44 Approval No.
Group 0-1(0-18kg)	FAIR G0/1 TYPE “S” FAIR S.r.l	rearward facing with vehicle specific ISOFIX platform type “G”	E4 04443718
Group 1(9-18kg)	FAIR G0/1 TYPE “S” FAIR S.r.l	forward facing with vehicle specific ISOFIX platform type “I”	E4 04443718

CRS Manufacturer information

FAIR S.r.l http://www.fairbimbofix.com

* The rear seat has to be adjusted to the rearmost position when the CRS is fitted into the car.

*Please ask dealer to buy FAIR CRS

• FAIR G0/1 TYPE "S" CRS : E894566099
• RWF ISOFIX PLATFORM TYPE "G": E894566099A
• FWF ISOFIX PLATFORM TYPE "I" : E894566099B

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYN039042R/OYN039026R

(1) Driver's front air bag
(2) Passenger's front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch

WARNING

• Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimise the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.
  • SRS and pre-tensioners contain explosive chemicals.
  If scraping a vehicle without removing SRS and pre-tensioners from a vehicle, it may cause fire. Before scraping a vehicle, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings away from water or any liquid. If the SRS components are inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it may cause fire or severe injury.

How does the air bag system operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of serious frontal or side collision in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
- There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.
- Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. The determining, factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
- The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

- In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

- There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury or death caused by deploying air bags in a collision, the driver should sit as far back from the steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 250 mm (10 inches) away). The front passenger should always move their seat as far back as possible and sit back in their seat.
  • Air bag inflates instantly in an event of a collision, passengers may be injured by the air bag expansion force if they are not in a proper position.
  • Air bag inflation may cause injuries including facial or bodily abrasions, injuries from broken glasses or burns.

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult with the doctor if the symptom persists.

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air bag related parts in the steering wheel and/or instrument panel and/or in both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. To prevent injury, do not touch the air bag storage areas internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated.

■Type A

■Type B

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat other than that explained in section - Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger's seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch, you can activate or deactivate the front passenger's air bag when necessary.

For more details, please refer to 3-49 page.

WARNING

• NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
• Never put a child restraint in the front passenger's seat other than that as mentioned in section - Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, be sure to install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and securely lock the child restraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air bags could cause serious injury or death to an infant or child.

Abstract black-and-white icon depicting two stylized human figures in motion, no text or symbols present.

W7-147

Air bag warning and indicator

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the warning light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

Passenger air bag "ON" indicator

Passenger air bag "OFF" indicator

CAUTION

If the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the passenger's front air bag OFF indicator will not illuminate (The passenger's front air bag ON indicator comes on and goes off after approximately 60 seconds) and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in a frontal impact even if the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The passenger's front air bag ON indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The passenger's front air bag ON indicator also comes on when the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position and goes off after approximately 60 seconds.

The passenger's front air bag OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

The front passenger's air bag OFF indicator also comes on when the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position and goes off when the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position.

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator (front passenger's seat only)

11. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch (front passenger's seat only)

The SRSCM continuously monitors all SRS components whilst the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the air bag warning light should go out.

WARNING

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. We recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
- The light comes on whilst the vehicle is in motion.
- The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

3D rendered diagram of a driver's front air bag (1), showing a seated passenger seat with hands on the back, no text or symbols present.

The air bag modules are located both in the centre of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

3D rendered illustration of a person in a car seat with a pillow, no text or symbols present

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

3D rendered illustration of a person embracing inside a car seat (no text or symbols)

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

Passenger's front air bag

3D rendered illustration of a person using a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

• Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. It may become a dangerous projectile and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

■Passenger's front air bag

Close-up of a car's front grille and side air vent, highlighting the 'ARSA' logo (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Driver's and passenger's front air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The indications of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the centre of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child restraints – every trip, every time, everyone! Air bags inflate with considerable force and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain maximum benefit from the air bag. Even with air bags, improperly and unbelted occupants can be severely injured when the air bag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant safety contained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or booster seat in the front seat.
  NB See section - Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Front and side impact air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as practical from the front air bags, whilst still maintaining control of the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags. Improperly positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or centre console – always sit in an upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the passenger's front air bag OFF indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• No objects (such as crash pad cover, mobile phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windscreen glass and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated or blinks whilst the vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once – we recommend that the system be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer immediately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy the front air bags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30^ from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. Additionally, the air bags will only deploy once. Seat belts must be worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an air bag deployment in case of an accident. NB See section - Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimise the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag whilst the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, centred on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed.
• The SRS air bag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
• Do not attach any objects on front windscreen and inside mirror.

Close-up of a mechanical switch mechanism with a magnified inset showing the component (no text or symbols visible)

Passenger air bag "ON/OFF" switch

The passenger's front air bag can be deactivated by the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch. When switched off a rearward facing child seat can be installed in this seating position. When using this facility the seat must always be put in its most rearward position.

NB. For safety reasons, when installing child seats within the vehicle the back seat positions are preferred, such practice for installing a child seat in the front passenger seat (with the Air Bag switch positioned OFF) should only be used in exceptional circumstances.

In addition the air bag can also be deactivated if the front passenger's seat is unoccupied by a person.

To deactivate or reactivate the passenger's front air bag:

To deactivate the passenger's front air bag, insert the master key into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the OFF position. The passenger's front air bag OFF indicator (请勿将) will illuminate and stay on until the passenger's front air bag is reactivated.

To reactivate the passenger's front air bag, insert the master key into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON position. The passenger's front air bag OFF indicator will go out and the passenger's front air bag ON indicator (✗) will illuminate for approximately 60 seconds.

WARNING

On some models, the front air bag ON/OFF switch could turn by using a similar small rigid device. Always check the status of the front air bag ON/OFF switch and passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator.

NOTICE

• When the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position, the passenger's front air bag is activated and child or infant seat should not be installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position, the passenger's front air bag is deactivated.

CAUTION

- If the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is not working properly, the air bag warning light (💡) on the instrument panel will illuminate.

And, the passenger's front air bag OFF indicator ( 212 ) will not illuminate (The passenger's front air bag ON indicator comes on and goes off after approximately 60 seconds), the SRS Control Module reactivate the passenger's front air bag and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If the SRS air bag warning light blinks or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• The driver is responsible for the proper position of the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front air bag only when the ignition switch is switched off, or the malfunction may occur in the SRS Control Module.
  And there may be a danger that the driver's and/or front passenger's and/or side and curtain air bag may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger's seat unless the passenger's front air bag has been deactivated. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an air bag deployment in case of an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is equipped with the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat other than that explained in section - Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch. Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger's seat, reactivate the front passenger's air bag.

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side impact air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

WARNING

- The side impact air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times whilst the vehicle is in motion. The air bags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• For best protection from the side impact air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
• Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact air bag inflates.
• Do not put any objects between the side airbag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.
• To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side impact sensor when the ignition switch is on.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side impact and curtain air bags to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened.
  Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable objects on the clothes hanger.
• Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Failure to follow the above mentioned instructions can result in injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

Air bag system operation (deployment/non deployment)

There are many types of situations in which an air bag would not provide additional protection to the vehicle occupants.

These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a close-up inset showing a small component (no text or symbols visible)

Front view of a modern sedan car with grille and headlights (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a car interior showing a rectangular object and a dotted circle highlighting a section (no text or symbols visible)

OED030079/OYN039030/H/OJC035031/1LDA2054

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor

WARNING

- Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed. This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

- If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should, causing severe injury or death. Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or B pillar where side collision sensors are installed. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- Your vehicle has been designed to absorb impact and deploy the air bag(s) in certain collisions. Installing aftermarket bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicles collision and air bag deployment performance.

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

Two-panel illustration showing a car and a dashboard with arrows indicating motion or control (no text or symbols)

Side air bags

Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver's and front passenger's air bags) are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

- In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

Illustration showing two cars with a person inside a car, one pointing at the side of the car (no text or symbols present)

• Frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

Illustration of a silver sedan with a broken-out car and a lightning bolt symbol (no text or labels)

• Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection. However, side impact or curtain air bags may inflate depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

Top-down illustration of two cars in collision, one with a starburst effect (no text or symbols on the cars)

• In a slant or angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Safety features of your vehicle

Illustration of a truck and a car collision, no text or symbols present

Illustration of stacked luggage and a container on a surface (no text or symbols)

- Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "under-ride" collisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants.

However, side and/or curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and curtain air bags.

3D rendering of a silver car parked near a vertical pole, no visible text or symbols

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, we recommend that the system be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. A HYUNDAI authorised repairer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the floor, you shouldn't try to start the engine; we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor.
• Passengers should not move out of or change seats whilst the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle.
  • Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant. If more than one person uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the air bag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the air bag covers, they could be injured if the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on or near the air bag covers. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side impact air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side impact air bags.
• Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury or death.
  • Always sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, centred on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning label is attached to alert the passengers of potential risk of the air bag system.

Note that these government warnings focus on the risk of children, we also want you to be aware of the risks which adults are exposed to that have been described in previous pages.

	Keys / 4-2Remote keyless entry / 4-5Smart key / 4-8Theft-alarm system / 4-11Door locks / 4-13Tailgate / 4-17Windows / 4-19Bonnet / 4-24Fuel filler lid / 4-26
Features of your vehicle
	Panorama sunroof / 4-29Steering wheel / 4-33Mirrors / 4-36Instrument cluster / 4-40Rear parking assist system / 4-64Rearview camera / 4-68Hazard warning flasher / 4-69Lighting / 4-70Wipers and washers / 4-76Interior light / 4-80Defroster / 4-81Manual climate control system / 4-82Automatic climate control system / 4-91Windscreen defrosting and defogging / 4-100Storage compartment / 4-101Interior features / 4-104Audio system / 4-112

KEYS

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped or printed on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose your

keys, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

Type B

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically. To fold the key, fold the key manually whilst pressing the release button.

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

Type C

To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button and remove the mechanical key.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

WARNING

- Ignition key (Smart key)

Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the ignition key (smart key) is dangerous even if the key is not in the ignition switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the ENGINE START/STOP button. The ignition key (smart key) would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine is running.

WARNING

We recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

Immobiliser system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobiliser system to reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle use.

Your immobiliser system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobiliser system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies if the ignition key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobiliser system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobiliser system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobiliser system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobiliser password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

\*NOTICE

The immobiliser system detects the presence of a key in the ignition switch. To ensure the system performs correctly, the keys should be separated after delivery of the vehicle so that only one key is near the ignition switch when using the vehicle. The engine may not start or may stop shortly after starting if more than one key is near the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

The engine may not start for the metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal from normally transmitting.

\*NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobiliser system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobiliser system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobiliser system because it could cause the immobiliser system to malfunction. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobiliser system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

Remote keyless entry system operations

Lock (1)

All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the lock button is pressed.

If all doors are closed, the hazard warning lights blink once to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are locked. If any door (or tailgate) is opened when the lock button is pressed, all doors will not lock.

Unlock (2)

All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors (and tailgate) will lock automatically unless you open any door within 30 seconds.

Tailgate unlock (3, if equipped)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

After pressing this button, the tailgate will lock automatically unless you open the tailgate within 30 seconds.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.

* The word "HOLD" is written on the button to inform you that you must press and hold the button for 1 second.

Transmitter precautions

NOTICE

• The transmitter may not work if any of following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work properly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If the transmitter is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the transmitter could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the transmitter gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

Exploded view diagram of a mobile phone showing internal components and casing (no text or symbols)

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter centre cover (1).
2. Replace the battery with a new one. When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.
3. Install the rear cover.

For transmitter replacement, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
  • Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

CAUTION

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

Top-down view of a car key with three buttons and a small icon on the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

OXM049001L OYN049005/H

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock the doors (and tailgate) and even start the engine without inserting the key.

The functions of the buttons on a smart key are similar to the remote keyless entry. (Refer to the "Remote keyless entry" in this section.)

Smart key functions

Carrying the smart key, you may lock and unlock the vehicle doors (and tailgate). Also, you may start the engine. Refer to the following, for more details.

Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow tag, no visible text or symbols

Locking

Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors (and tailgate) closed and any door unlocked, locks all the doors (and tailgate). The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are locked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the outside door handle. If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not, you should check if indicator on the central door lock/unlock switch has illuminated or pull the outside door handle.

Even though you press the button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound if any of the following occurs:

• The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is opened.

Unlocking

Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors (and tailgate) closed and locked, unlocks all the doors (and tailgate). The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the outside door handle.

When the smart key is recognized in the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open a door without possession of the smart key.

NOTICE

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7\~1 m (28\~40 in.) from the outside door handle.

Tailgate unlocking

If you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the outside tailgate handle, with your smart key in possession, the tailgate will unlock and open when you press the tailgate handle switch.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to "Starting the engine with a smart key" in section 5.

\*NOTICE

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.

Smart key precautions

\*NOTICE

• If, for some reason, you happen to lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if necessary. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key and we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• The smart key will not work if any of the following occurs:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.

• The smart key is near a mobile two-way radio system or a mobile phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work properly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the smart key gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may malfunction, excluding the car from the warranty.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

OHM048005

Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try to replace the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

The circuit inside the smart key can have a problem if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.
3. Install the rear cover.

\*NOTICE

• Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.
- Circuits inside the smart key may develop problems when dropped, exposed to moisture or static electricity.
- If you suspect that your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OJC040170

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm system will have a label attached to the vehicle with the following words:

1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM

graph TD
    A["Armed stage"] --> B["Theft-alarm stage"]
    B --> C["Disarmed stage"]
    C --> A

This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights.

Armed stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate) and the engine bonnet are closed and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine bonnet remains open, the hazard warning lights will not blink and the theft-alarm will not arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine bonnet are closed after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink once.

Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the system is armed whilst a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leave the vehicle. If any door (or tailgate) or engine bonnet is opened within 30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage, the system is disarmed to prevent unnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs whilst the system is armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using the transmitter (or smart key).
  • The engine bonnet is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for 27 seconds, unless the system is disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when:

Transmitter

• The door unlock button is pressed.
• The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)
• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position for 30 seconds or more.

Smart key

• The door unlock button is pressed.
• The button of the front outside door is pressed whilst carrying the smart key.
• The engine is started. (within 3 seconds)

After the doors are unlocked, the hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.

After pressing the unlock button, if any door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

\*NOTICE - Immobiliser system

• If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch and start the engine. Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobiliser system because it could cause the immobiliser system to malfunction. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

DOOR LOCKS

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically. (if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter or smart key. (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
- If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

WARNING

• If you don't close the door securely, the door may open again.
• Be careful that someone's body and hands are not trapped when closing the door.

Close-up of a car's front and side views showing the door, vent, and internal structure (no text or symbols visible)

In case of an emergency

If the power door lock switch does not operate electrically, the only way to lock the door(s) is with the ignition key from the outside key hole.

Doors without the outside key hole, you can lock the door as follows:

1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency door lock hole and turn the key horizontally to lock.
3. Close the door securely.

Once the tailgate is closed when the power door lock switch does not operate electrically, you will not be able to open the tailgate.

Close-up of a car interior showing the intake manifold and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door handle

If the inner door handle is pulled once when the door is locked, the door will unlock.

If the inner door handle is pulled twice, the door will open.

Inside handle override

(Front door, if equipped)

If the inner door handle is pulled when the door is locked, the door will unlock and open.

Inside handle central door unlock

(Front door, if equipped)

If the inner door handle is pulled when all doors are locked, all doors will unlock.

WARNING

Do not pull the inner door handle of driver's (or passenger's) door whilst the vehicle is moving.

With central door lock/unlock switch

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

It is operated by pressing the door lock/unlock switch.

- When you press the door lock/unlock switch, all vehicle doors will lock and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate for approximately 60 seconds (If the key is in the ignition switch, the indicator light on the switch will continuously illuminate).

If any door is opened when the switch is pressed, all doors will not lock.

• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of the door lock switch will blink. If you press the switch when the indicator blinks, all doors will lock.
• When you press the door lock/unlock switch again, all vehicle doors will unlock and the indicator light on the switch will not illuminate.

\*NOTICE

If the doors are locked with the transmitter or smart key, the doors cannot be unlocked with the central door lock/unlock switch. (if equipped)

WARNING - Door lock malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to function whilst you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following:

• Operate the other door locks and handles.
• Lower the driver's window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open the tailgate.

WARNING - Doors

• The doors should always be fully closed and locked whilst the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door. Opening a door when something is approaching can cause damage or injury.

WARNING - Unlocked vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can invite theft or possible harm to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle whilst you are gone. Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING

If people must spend a longer time in the vehicle whilst it is very hot or cold outside, there is risk of injuries of danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

WARNING - Unattended children

An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Furthermore, children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

All doors will automatically lock after the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). For deactivation of this feature, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Engine off door unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlock:

Without smart key system

When the key is removed from the ignition switch.

With smart key system

When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the OFF position.

For deactivation of this feature, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Deadlock system (if equipped)

Some vehicles are equipped with a deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent opening a door from either inside or outside the vehicle once the deadlocks have been activated providing an additional measure of vehicle security.

To lock the vehicle by using the deadlock function, the doors must be locked by using the transmitter or the smart key. To unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or smart key must be used again.

WARNING

Do not lock the doors with the transmitter or smart key with anybody left in the vehicle. The passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the doors. For example, if the door is locked with the transmitter, the passenger in the vehicle cannot unlock the door without the transmitter.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Turn the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock
   ( 🔒 position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open even though the inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle (2) until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door locks

If children accidentally open the rear doors whilst the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out and be severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear doors from inside, the rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

TAILGATE

Illustration of a car's rear window and side door, showing hand placement and cleaning steps (no text or symbols)

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key, transmitter, smart key or central door lock/unlock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate unlock button on the transmitter or smart key is pressed (if equipped). If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle and pulling it up.
  Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate is locked automatically.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• When jacking up the vehicle to change a tyre or repair the vehicle, do not operate the tailgate. This could cause the tailgate to close improperly.

CAUTION

Do not put any heavy object on the covering shelf. It may damage the covering shelf.

WARNING

• Do not put any object on the covering shelf. If the vehicle suddenly stops or makes a curve, the object may injure passengers.
• Watch out for the edge of the covering shelf, when you are using the luggage room. You may injure yourself.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched.

WARNING - Exhaust fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

Diagram of a car interior showing the open trunk and internal compartments, with two views of the seat (no text or symbols present)

Emergency tailgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing the tailgate.

WARNING

• For emergency, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergency only. Use extreme caution, especially whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and a circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Luggage room lamp

Luggage room lamp turns on when the tailgate is opened. It remains on until the tailgate is securely closed.

\*NOTICE

Make sure to close the tailgate securely. If it remains open whilst engine is not running, it may cause battery discharge because luggage room lamp remains on.

WINDOWS

(1) Driver's door power window switch
(2) Front passenger's door power window switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window switch*
(4) Rear door (left) power window switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch*

* if equipped

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. Also, a power window lock switch which that can block the operation of rear passenger windows. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated within the 30 seconds period.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows whilst driving.

WARNING

Do not install any accessories in the area of windows. It may impact jam protection.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
- Whilst driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening

Window opening and closing Type A

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

Type B - Auto down window (if equipped) Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position whilst the window is in operation, pull up the switch momentarily to the opposite direction of the window movement.

Type C - Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position whilst the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling up the power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

Interior view of a car with a teddy bear on the windshield and a yellow arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

Automatic reversal (if equipped) If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 12 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance whilst the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

\*NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the window is only active when the "auto up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.

WARNING

Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction.

WARNING

The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate whilst resetting power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Close-up of a car air vent with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Power window lock button

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch to the lock position (pressed).

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.
• The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.
  • Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms outside the window opening whilst driving.

Close-up of a car handle with yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Manual windows (if equipped)

To raise or lower the window, turn the window regulator handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

WARNING

When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's arms, hands and body are safely out of the way.

BONNET

Interior view of a car showing the wheel and seat, with a highlighted orange tag (no text or symbols visible)

Opening the bonnet

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the bonnet. The bonnet should pop open slightly.

WARNING

Open the bonnet after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the bonnet slightly, push the secondary latch inside of the bonnet centre and lift the bonnet.

Close-up of a car's front wheel assembly with a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Pull out the support rod from the bon-net.

2. Hold the bonnet opened with the support rod.

WARNING - Hot parts

Be very careful not to touch the support rod when the engine and parts are hot. You could get burned or get seriously injured.

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check the following:
2. All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.
3. Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.
4. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.
5. Lower the bonnet halfway (lifted approximately 30cm from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place. Then double check to be sure the bonnet is secure.

WARNING

• Before closing the bonnet ensure that all obstructions are removed from the bonnet opening. Closing the bonnet with an obstruction present in the bonnet opening may result in property damage or severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. Check there is no bonnet open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. If the bonnet is not latched whilst the vehicle is moving, the chime will sound to warn the driver the bonnet is not fully latched. Driving with the bonnet opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the bonnet from falling and possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet raised. The view will be blocked and the bonnet could fall or get damaged.

FUEL FILLER LID

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a highlighted parking seat (no text or symbols visible)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing two connected components with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler lid opener.

NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel filler lid opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it "clicks" once. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely closed.

WARNING - Refuelling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refuelling.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

WARNING - Refuelling dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable materials. When refuelling, please note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or explosion.

• Read and follow all warning at the gas station facility.
• Before refuelling note the location of the Emergency Petrol Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refuelling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapours resulting in rapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other petrol source.

- When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refuelling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapours causing a fire. Once refuelling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store petrol.

• Do not use mobile phones whilst refuelling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from mobile phones can potentially ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.
• When refuelling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapours causing a fire. Once refuelling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle whilst at a gas station especially during refuelling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- If a fire breaks out during refuelling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
  • After refuelling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Top-down view of a car air vent system (no text or symbols visible)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Sunroof open warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver turns off the engine and opens the driver-side door when the sun-roof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approximately 7 seconds. Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

CAUTION

• Do not continue to move the sun-roof control lever after the sun-roof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as cause theft.

WARNING

A panorama sunroof is made of glass, therefore it may break in an accident. If you do not have your seat belt on, you may go through the broken glass and get injured or killed. For all passengers safety, have an appropriate protection on (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.).

\*NOTICE

The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the slide position but can slide whilst in a tilt position.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or roller blind whilst driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.
• If you would like to carry items on the roof rack using a cross bar, do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the roof rack, do not load heavy items above the sunroof or glass roof.
• All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Interior view of a car showing airflow direction arrows and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

Sliding the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the roller blind.

To open or close the sunroof (manual slide feature), pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward for less than 0.4 second.

To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward for more than 0.4 second and then release it. The sunroof will automatically slide open all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward for more than 0.4 second and then release it. The sunroof will close automatically but will not close all the way. If you desire to completely close the sunroof, push the lever once more until the sunroof is closed.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the sunroof and the motor, do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is in the fully open, closed or tile position(s).

Cartoon illustration of a teddy bear on the windshield showing a yellow arrow pointing to it, with no text or symbols present.

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detected whilst the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

WARNING

Objects less than 4 mm (0.16 inch) in diameter caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse glass and the glass will not stop and reverse direction.

Close-up of a car air vent system with a highlighted connector (no text or symbols visible)

Tilting the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the roller blind.

To open the sunroof, push the sunroof control lever upward.

To close the sunroof, push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the sunroof to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
• Never adjust the sunroof or sun-shade whilst driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
  • To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sunroof whilst driving.
• In order to prevent accidental operation of the sunroof, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the sunroof.
• Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause vehicle damage.

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the sunroof guide rail of between the sunroof and roof panel, which can make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the motor could be damaged. In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly.

\*NOTICE

After washing the vehicle or after a rain, be sure to wipe off the water on the sun-roof before operating the sunroof.

Interior view of a car ceiling with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

Roller blind

The roller blinds are installed inside of the sunroof and glass roof.

Open or close it manually when you need to.

Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the roller blind.

\*NOTICE

It is normal for wrinkles to form on the blind because of its material characteristic.

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the followings)

• Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected.

• The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate.

• Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

• Open the roller blind.
• Close the sunroof.
• Release the sunroof control lever.
• Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close (about 10 seconds) until the sunroof moves a little. Then, release the lever.
• Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close until the sunroof operates as follows:

TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset.

\*NOTICE

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering (EPS)

Power steering uses the motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.

The steering effort becomes heavier as the vehicle's speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle's speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steering during normal vehicle operation, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

- The EPS warning light does not illuminate.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the EPS system performs the diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering effort will return to its normal condition.

- A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or LOCK position.

- Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

- If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- The steering effort increases if the steering wheel is rotated continuously when the vehicle is not in motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal conditions.

- When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise could occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

Tilt steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, whilst permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING

- Never adjust the angle of the steering wheel whilst driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle, push down the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted indicator light showing an upward arrow (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after approximately 30 minutes.

CAUTION

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. The cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a yellow directional arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

\*NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the centre view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision out of the rear window.

WARNING

Do not adjust the rearview mirror whilst the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and do not install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag.

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start driving and whilst the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Electrochromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights of the car behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse, the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

CAUTION

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

- The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

- Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch (if equipped). The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

WARNING - Rearview mirrors

• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. In some countries, the left outside rearview mirror is also convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

Close-up of a car's side mirror and steering wheel, showing yellow directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Remote control
Manual type (if equipped)
To adjust an outside mirror, move the control lever.

Close-up of a car's air conditioner dial with yellow directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols on the dial itself)

Electric type (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, move the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, put the lever into neutral (centre) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate whilst the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.

Close-up of a car interior with a yellow arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

Folding the outside rearview mirror Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car's top panel with a yellow arrow pointing to the knob (no text or symbols visible)

Electric Type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, press the button.

To unfold it, press the button again.

CAUTION

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary whilst the engine is not running.

CAUTION

In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don't fold it by hand. It could cause motor failure.

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push the button ( ) for rear window defroster.

The outside rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the button again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns off after 20 minutes.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■ Type A

■ Type B

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Warning and indicator lights
5. Engine temperature gauge
6. Fuel gauge
7. Odometer/Tripmeter*
   * if equipped

OJC043040R/OJC043041R

Interior view of a car showing a directional control panel with a yellow arrow and icons, no readable text or symbols present.

Instrument panel illumination (if equipped)

Rotate the illumination control switch to adjust the instrument panel illumination intensity. For instrument cluster type A, the vehicle's parking lights or headlights should be on to adjust the instrument panel illumination.

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster whilst driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

• Kilometer per hour
• Type A
  

• Type B
  

Close-up of a circular gauge or dial with numerical markings (no readable text or symbols beyond scale indicators)

OJC040048

The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour and/or miles per hour.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

■ Type A

■ Type B

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON. The gauge is supplemented by a Engine coolant temperature warning light, which illuminates when the engine is overheating.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the engine overheats" in section 6.

CAUTION

If the gauge shows beyond the normal range area toward the "130" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

- The arrow indicates the fuel filler lid is in the left side of the vehicle.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the "0" level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Features of your vehicle

Odometer (km or mi.)

The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

NOTICE

It is forbidden to alter the odometer of all vehicles with the intent to change the mileage registered on the odometer. The alteration may void your warranty coverage.

Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator (if equipped)

This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs which gear is desired whilst driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up: ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down: ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

For example

3: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs which gear is desired whilst driving to save fuel.

• Shifting up: ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down: ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

For example

3: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing a close-up of the dashboard with arrows pointing to the steering wheel (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Tripmeter/Trip computer (if equipped) The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving, when the ignition switch is in the ON position. All stored driving information (except TRIP A/B) resets if the battery is disconnected.

Press the TRIP button for less than 1 second to select any mode as follows:

graph TD
    A["Tripmeter A"] --> B["Tripmeter B"]
    B --> C["Distance to empty*"]
    C --> D["Average fuel consumption*"]
    D --> E["Average refuel consumption*"]
    E --> F["Instant fuel consumption*"]
    F --> G["Average speed*"]
    G --> H["Elapsed time*"]
    H --> A

* if equipped

Features of your vehicle

Tripmeter (km or mi.)

TRIP A : Tripmeter A

This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last trip-meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).

Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or TRIP B) is displayed, clears the trip-meter to zero (0.0).

Distance to empty (if equipped) (km or mi.)

This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine. When the remaining distance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will be displayed.

The meter's working range is from 50 to 999 km (30 to 999 miles).

Average fuel consumption (if equipped) (l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input. For an accurate calculation, drive more than 50 m (0.03 miles).

Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (---).

Average refuel consumption (l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last tank refuel. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input. For an accurate calculation, drive more than 50 m (0.03 miles).

The average refuel consumption resets to zero (---) when the vehicle is refueled.

■ Type A

Type B

OJC040105

Instant fuel consumption (if equipped) (l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the instant fuel consumption of the last few seconds.

\*NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the "Distance to empty" function may not operate correctly.
  The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
  • The fuel consumption and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance. This may differ from the actual driving distance available.

Average speed (km/h or MPH)

This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle since the last average speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average speed keeps going whilst the engine is running.

Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time (if equipped)

This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the driving time keeps going whilst the engine is running.

The meter's working range is from 00:00\~99:59.

Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the driving time is being displayed, clears the driving time to zero (00:00).

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). If any light does not illuminate, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is not working properly. If the AIR BAG warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on whilst driving, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For information about the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator, refer to "Air bag - supplemental restraint system" in section 3.

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver and passenger, the seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

For details, refer to the "Seat belt" in section 3.

Engine oil pressure warning

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates whilst driving:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light stays on whilst the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on whilst the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction.

If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Engine oil level warning light

The engine oil level warning light illuminates when the engine oil level should be checked.

If the warning light comes on, check the engine oil level as soon as possible and add engine oil as required.

Slowly pour the recommended oil little by little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity : approximately 0.6 \~ 1.0 /)

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Do not overfill the engine oil. Make sure the oil level is not above F (Full) mark on the dipstick.

\*NOTICE

- If you travel approximately 50 km \~100 km after the engine warms up, after adding the engine oil, the warning light will go off.

- Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3 times within 10 seconds, the warning light will go off immediately. However, when you turn off the warning light without adding the engine oil, the light will come on again after travelling approximately 50 100 km after the engine warms up.

CAUTION

If the light comes on continuously after adding the engine oil and travelling approximately 50 \~ 100 km after the engine warms up, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Even if this light doesn't come on after the engine has started, the engine oil should be checked and supplied periodically.

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, it indicates a malfunction in the turn signal system. You should consult your repairer.

This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Low Beam Indicator

This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the low beam position.

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the front fog lights are ON.

Rear fog light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the rear fog lights are ON.

Light on indicator

The indicator illuminates when the tail lights or headlights are ON.

Automatic transaxle shift position indicator (if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

Manual transaxle shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is desired whilst driving to save fuel.

For example

▲3: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator (Up & Down Arrow and gear) is not displayed.

Engine coolant temperature warning light

The warning light shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON.

The warning light illuminates if the temperature of the engine coolant is above 120 ± 3^ ( 248 ± 5.5^ ).

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "Overheating" in the section 6.

NOTICE

If the engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system.

If the warning light illuminates whilst the vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

EPS (Electric power steering) system warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates after the ignition key is turned to the ON position and then it will go off when the engine starts.

This light also comes on when the EPS has malfunctioned. If it comes on whilst driving, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Door ajar warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely.

Tailgate open warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when the tailgate is not closed securely.

Door and tailgate open indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when a door or/and tailgate is not closed securely.

Immobiliser indicator (if equipped)

Without smart key system

This indicator illuminates when the immobiliser key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine. The indicator goes out after approximately 30 seconds.

If this indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in the ON position before starting the engine, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

With smart key system

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle equipped with the smart key, the immobiliser indicator illuminates, blinks or goes off.

- When the smart key is in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position, the indicator will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds to indicate that you are able to start the engine. However, when the smart key is not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator will blink for a few seconds to indicate that you are not able to start the engine.

- If the indicator illuminates only for 2 seconds and goes out when the ENGINE START/STOP button is turned to ON position with the smart key in the vehicle, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- When the battery is weak, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator blinks, you are not able to start the engine. However, you are able to start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button directly with the smart key. Also, if the smart key system related parts have a problem, the indicator will blink.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "0" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (check engine light) (if equipped)

This indicator is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components. If this indicator illuminates whilst driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emission control system.

This indicator will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go off in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates whilst driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable, but we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.
• If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power. We recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

When the malfunction indicator light blinks, it may stop blinking after driving the vehicle at more than 37 mph (60km/h) or at more than second gear with 1500 \~ 2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light continues to blink in spite of the procedure, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a long time, the DPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

Parking brake & brake fluid warning

Parking brake warning

This warning light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. The warning light should go off when the parking brake is released.

The parking brake warning chime (if equipped) will sound to remind you that the parking brake is applied when you are driving above approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release the parking brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required. Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail whilst you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning light on is dangerous. If the brake warning light remains on, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ABS (Anti-lock brake system) warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on, comes on whilst driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, this indicates that the ABS may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distribution (EBD) system warning light

If two warning lights illuminate at the same time whilst driving, your vehicle may have a malfunction with ABS and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

If both ABS and Brake warning lights are on and stay on, your vehicle's brake system will not work normally. So you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) indicator (if equipped)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions. Under normal driving conditions, the ESC indicator will remain off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

But, if the ESC system malfunctions the indicator illuminates and stays on. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESP is deactivated.

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a discharged battery, the ESC OFF indicator may illuminate. In this case, turn the steering wheel 360 degrees to the left and 360 degrees to the right whilst the ignition switch is in the ON position. Then, restart the engine after the ignition is off. If the ESC OFF indicator does not turn off, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON-OFF button on the steering wheel is pushed.

The indicator goes off when the cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed again. For more information about the use of cruise control, refer to "Cruise control system" in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

SET

The indicator illuminates when the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates when the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed. The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the system is disengaged.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) indicator (if equipped)

Low tyre pressure telltale

Low tyre pressure position telltale (if equipped)

The low tyre pressure telltale comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

The low tyre pressure and position tell-tales illuminate when one or more of your tyres is significantly underinflated.

The low tyre pressure telltale will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For details, refer to the TPMS on chapter 6

WARNING

Significantly low tyre pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tyres will cause the tyres to overheat and fail.

WARNING - Safe stopping

- The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tyre damage caused by external factors.

- If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

AUTO STOP indicator (if equipped)

This indicator will illuminate when the engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.

When the automatic starting occurs, the "AUTO STOP" indicator on the cluster will blink for 5 seconds.

For more details, refer to the "ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system" in section 5.

\*NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system has malfunctioned.

Sunroof open warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver turns off the engine and opens the driver-side door when the sun-roof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approximately 7 seconds.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.

Glow indicator (Diesel engine)

The indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The engine can be started after the preheat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery condition.

\*NOTICE

If the engine does not start within 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and then to the ON position, in order to preheat again.

CAUTION

If the preheat indicator continues to illuminate or blinks on and off after the engine has warmed up or whilst driving, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuel filter warning light (Diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is set to the ON position and then it will go off. If it lights up whilst the engine is running, it indicates that water has accumulated inside the fuel filter. If this happens, remove the water from the fuel filter. For more information, refer to "Fuel filter" in section 7.

CAUTION

When the fuel filter warning light illuminates, engine power (vehicle speed & idle speed) may decrease. If you keep driving with the warning light on, you can damage your vehicle's engine parts and injection system of the Common Rail.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

LCD display warning (if equipped) Door open! (if equipped)

It displays the corresponding door or tailgate that is not closed securely.

Rear parking assist warning (if equipped)

It displays the area an obstacle is detected whilst moving rearward.

For details, refer to "Rear parking assist system" in section 4.

Low Tyre Pressure (if equipped)

It displays the corresponding tyre that is low with pressure. For details, refer to "TPMS" in section 6.

The actual indicator in LCD display may differ from the illustration.

Speed limit (if equipped)

The speed limit illuminates on the LCD display when the speed limit control system is enabled.

The speed limit

illuminates on the LCD display when the speed limit ON-OFF button on the steering wheel is pressed.

If the " indicator is shown, it indicates the speed limit has not been set.

The set speed limit will display when the speed limit control switch (SET-/RES+) is ON.

the speed limit, the set speed limit will blink and chime will sound.

The set speed limit turns off when the speed limit is cancelled by pressing the CANCEL button.

The speed limit display goes off when the speed limit is deactivated.

Also, if there is a problem with the speed limit control system, the "Indicator will blink.

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more information about the speed limit control usage, refer to "Speed limit control system" in section 5.

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is not in the vehicle and if any door is opened or closed with the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC,

ON, or START position, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the chime sounds for 5 seconds when the smart key is not in the vehicle and the door is closed.

Always have the smart key with you.

Key is not detected

If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is not detected and you press the ENGINE START/STOP button, the warning illumi-

nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also, the immobiliser indicator blinks for 10 seconds.

Low key battery

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the OFF position when the smart key in the vehicle discharges, the warn-

ing illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds. Also, the warning chime sounds once.

Replace the battery with a new one.

Press brake pedal to start engine (Automatic transaxle)

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing

the brake pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (Manual transaxle)

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing

the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P" position (Automatic transaxle)

If you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will turn to the

ACC position. If the button is pressed once more it will turn to the ON position. The warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position to turn off the engine.

Also, the warning chime sounds for about 10 seconds. (if equipped)

Press start button again

If you can not operate the ENGINE START/STOP button when there is a problem with the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton system, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds and the chime sounds continuously to indicate that you could start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once more.

The chime will stop if the ENGINE START/STOP button system works normally or the theft alarm system is armed. If the warning illuminates each time you press the ENGINE START/STOP button, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine (Automatic transaxle)

If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral) position, the warning illuminates for

about 10 seconds on the LCD display. You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P(Park) position.

Press start button whilst turn steering

If the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the warning illumi-

nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds once and the ENGINE START/STOP button light blinks for 10 seconds.

When you are warned, press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst turning the steering wheel right and left.

Check steering wheel lock

If the steering wheel does not lock normally when the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the OFF position, the

warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE START/STOP button light blinks for 10 seconds.

Press start button with smart key

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst the warning "Key is not detected" illuminates the warning "Please

press the start button with smart key" illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the immobiliser indicator blinks for 10 seconds.

Check stop lamp fuse

When the stop lamp fuse is disconnected, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for 10 seconds in ACC.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The rear parking assist system assists the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much attention to what is behind you as you would in a vehicle without a rear parking assist system.

WARNING

The rear parking assist system is a supplementary function only. The operation of the rear parking assist system can be affected by several factors (including environmental conditions). It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the area behind the vehicle before and whilst backing up.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and a control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Operation of the rear parking assist system

Operating condition

- This system will activate when the indicator on the rear parking assist OFF button is not illuminated. If you desire to deactivate the rear parking assist system, press the rear parking assist OFF button again. (The indicator on the button will illuminate.) To turn the system on, press the button again. (The indicator on the button will go off.)

• This system will activate when backing up with the ignition switch ON. If the vehicle is moving at a speed over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance whilst the rear parking assist system is in operation is approximately 47 in. (120 cm).
• When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 47 in. to 24 in. (120 cm to 61 cm) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently
• When an object is 23 in. to 12 in. (60 cm to 31 cm) from the rear bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequently
• When an object is within 11 in. (30 cm) of the rear bumper: Buzzer sounds continuously.

Type of the warning indicator (if equipped)

Distance from object	Warning indicator
24 in. ~ 47 in.(61cm ~ 120 cm)
12 in. ~ 23 in.(31cm ~ 60 cm)
Less than 11 in.(30 cm)

*1: It indicates the range of sensed object by each sensor. (Left, Centre, Right)

* In case the object is between or close to the sensors, the indicator could be different.

Non-operational conditions of rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will operate normally when the moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces (unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise (vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes) are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are within range of the sensor.
7. Trailer towing.

The detecting range may decrease when:

1. The sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m (40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.

Rear parking assist system precautions

• The rear parking assist system may not sound sequentially depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

NOTICE

This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors; it can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, such as poles or objects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.

WARNING

Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the road, particularly pedestrians, and especially children. Be aware that some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the object's distance, size or material, all of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions before moving the vehicle in any direction.

Self-diagnosis

When you shift the gear to the R (Reverse) position and if one or more of the below occurs you may have a malfunction in the rear parking assist system.

- You don't hear an audible warning sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently.

yed. (if equipped)

If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist system malfunction. Always drive safely and cautiously.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

Side view of a white car with visible exhaust hood and side panel, placed on a textured surface (no text or symbols)

The rearview camera will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror whilst backing-up.

The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON/OFF button (1) when the rearview camera is activated.

To turn the camera on again, press the ON/OFF button (1) again when the ignition switch is on and the shift lever in R (Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned off and on again.

Detailed information for the rearview camera (Type B) is described in a separately supplied manual.

\*NOTICE

The warning "Warning! Check surroundings for safety" will appear on the rearview display when the rearview camera is activated.

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the inside/outside rearview mirror and the area behind the vehicle before and whilst backing up because there is a dead zone that can't be seen through the camera.
  • Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the vehicle in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. Both turn signal lights will blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch again.

LIGHTING

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors, the battery saver function does not operate.

Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

Headlight escort function (if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, with the engine off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlights (and/or tail lights) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlights (and/or tail lights) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or Auto position.

However, if you turn the light switch to the Auto position when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off.

Smart cornering light (if equipped)

Whilst driving the corner, for your sight and safety, the smart cornering light turns on automatically. The system will operate automatically as follows:

• When turning the headlight on
• When the steering wheel angle is over 25\~35 (it differs according to vehicle speed)
• When the vehicle speed is over 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• When driving forward

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) Off position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Parking light position ( )00

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the tail position, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

Hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and a yellow rotation arrow (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Headlight position (20

When the light switch is in the headlight position (2nd position), the head, tail, position, license and instrument panel lights are ON.

\*NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped) When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and headlights will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

CAUTION

• Never place anything over sensor (1) located on the instrument panel, this will ensure better auto-light system control.
• Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windscreen, the Auto light system may not work properly.

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and a yellow arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time whilst the engine is not running.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

Illustration of a hand pointing at a device control knob with icons (no text or symbols)

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

OED040804OED

Turn signals and lane change signals

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the off position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the off position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

One-touch lane change function (if equipped)

To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3 times.

\*NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

Hand holding a handheld device with a sun icon and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned on after the parklight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch (1) to the O (Off) position.

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

Rear fog light

To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the rear fog light switch (1) to the on position when the headlight is turned on.

Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the rear fog light switch is turned on after the front fog light switch (if equipped) is turned on and the headlight switch is in the parklight position.

To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear fog light switch to the on position again.

Daytime running light (if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the headlights turn OFF when:

1. The parklight switch is ON.

2. The engine is OFF.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a highlighted sensor or camera component (no text or symbols visible)

Headlight levelling device (if equipped)

To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam levelling switch.

The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper levelling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.

Loading condition	Switch position
Driver only	0
Driver + Front passenger	0
Full passengers (including driver)	1
Full passengers (including driver) + Maximum permissible loading	3
Driver + Maximum permissible loading	5

WIPERS AND WASHERS

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· 2 - High wiper speed
· 1 - Low wiper speed
- - - - Intermittent wipe
- AUTO* - Automatic control wipe
· O - Off
- √Single wipe

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)\*

D : Rear wiper/washer control

• Continuous wipe
• • • • Intermittent wipe
        · O - Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)\*

* : if equipped

Windscreen wipers (front)

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

√: For a single wiping cycle, move the lever to this position and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

O : Wiper is not in operation

---: Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.

1 : Normal wiper speed

2 : Fast wiper speed

\*NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windscreen, defrost the windscreen for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windscreen wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

AUTO (Automatic) control (if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windscreen glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to off position when the wiper is not in use.

CAUTION

When the ignition switch is ON and the windscreen wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situations to avoid any injury to the hands or other parts of the body:

• Do not touch the upper end of the windscreen glass facing the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the windscreen glass with a damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-screen glass.

CAUTION

When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the off position to stop the auto wiper operation.

The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode whilst washing the vehicle.

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the driver side windscreen glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

When starting the vehicle in winter, set the wiper switch in the off position. Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice may damage the windscreen wiper blades. Always remove all snow and ice and defrost the windscreen properly prior to operating the windscreen wipers.

Illustration of a hand interacting with a device, showing a yellow arrow pointing to the finger (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Windscreen washers (front)

In the O (Off) position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the windscreen is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windscreen washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the driver side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windscreen with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vision.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windscreen, do not operate the wipers when the windscreen is dry.
- To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use petrol, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

Close-up of a hand holding a camera lens with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Hand holding a camera lens with adjustment knobs and a yellow arrow pointing to the lens (no text or symbols visible)

OXM049103E OXM049125L

Rear window wiper and washer switch

The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

- Normal wiper operation

--- - Intermittent wipe

O - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1\~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

INTERIOR LIGHT

Room lamp

(1) Map lamp (if equipped)

Push the lamp lens to turn the light on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

(2)

The light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter or smart key, or the key is removed from the ignition switch, the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the light will turn off immediately.

If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the light stays on continuously.

(3)

In the on position, the light stays on at all times.

(4) O

In the off position, the light stays off at all times, even when a door is open.

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

\*NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the front windscreen, refer to "Windscreen defrosting and defogging" in this section.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, whilst engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the centre facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with outside mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time when you turn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with front wiper deicer, they will operate at the same time when you turn on the rear window defroster.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Type A

■Type B

1. A/C (Air conditioning) button
2. Air intake control button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Mode selection button
5. Temperature control knob
6. Fan speed control knob

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

OJC040057/OJC043058

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
   To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling :
3. Heating:
4. Cooling:
5. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
6. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
7. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
8. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windscreen. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windscreen and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windscreen with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windscreen with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to the maximum position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Circular mechanical component with numbered rings and yellow directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

■ Type A

■ Type B

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTICE

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) will cause fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continuous operation of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible whilst driving.

Circular mechanical knob with numbered segments and yellow curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

OJC040062

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the "0" position turns off the fan.

Circular mechanical knob with numbered segments and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

OJC043177

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning (A/C)

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
6. If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode to the 🎨 or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windscreen. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-screen, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

NOTICE

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

CAUTION

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely whilst driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windscreen even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.
  If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label (if equipped)

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

WARNING - Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil

and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

\*NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service. For more detailed information, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (Automatic) button
2. Climate control display
3. OFF button
4. A/C (Air conditioning) button
5. Front windscreen defroster button
6. Rear window defroster button
7. Air intake control button
8. Mode selection button
9. Temperature control knob
10. Fan speed control knob

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running.

OJC043065

Automatic heating and air conditioning

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically according to the temperature setting.

1. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

\*NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windscreen defrost button (Press the button one more time to deselect the front windscreen defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be controlled manually whilst other functions operate automatically.

- For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 23°C (73°F).

Close-up of a car's head and window with a yellow arrow pointing to a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pressing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except AUTO button whilst automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

OJC043068

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Refer to the illustration in the "Manual climate control system".

If you press the button once, the corresponding switch will turn on, and if you press the button again, the switch will turn off.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windscreen.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor.

Also you may select 2\~3 modes at the same time for desired air flow.

• face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
• face ( ) defrost ( ) mode
• floor ( ) defrost ( ) mode
  -face ( ) + floor () + defrost () mode

MAX (Maximum) defrost mode

When you select the MAX defrost mode, the following system settings will be made automatically:

• The air conditioning system will be turned on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be selected.
• The fan speed will be set to the high speed.

To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press the mode button or MAX defrost button again or AUTO button.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no text or symbols visible)

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or closed separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Circular mechanical component with yellow and black arrows indicating clockwise rotation, no text or symbols present.

OJC040070OJC040097F

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the left extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by 0.5^ C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.

This is normal condition. You can switch the temperature mode between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows:

Whilst pressing the AUTO button, press the OFF button for 3 seconds or more. The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade.

OJC043072

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button illuminates when the recirculated air position is selected.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button does not illuminate when the outside (fresh) air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

\*NOTICE

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in recirculated air position will cause fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected, will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible whilst driving.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob.

To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

OJC043074

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

\*NOTICE

Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

CAUTION

• The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
  • The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

\*NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely whilst driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
  • To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristics.

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windscreen even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.
  If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label (if equipped)

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the bonnet. Refer to chapter 8 for the location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Vehicles equipped with R-134a

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and

certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

WARNING - Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf

Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil

and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.

\*NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service. For more detailed information, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windscreen heating

Do not use the position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windscreen could cause the outer surface of the windscreen to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windscreen, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windscreen.

1

2

3

OJC040076

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select any fan speed except "0" position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air conditioning will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position.
   If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( )

4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( )

4. The air-conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed whilst driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely.

WARNING - Flammable materials

Do not store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

Close-up of a mechanical component with cutouts and mounting holes (no visible text or symbols)

Centre console storage

These compartments can be used to store small items.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a yellow warning symbol (no text or symbols on main subject)

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed whilst driving.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove box for a long time.

Glove box cooling (if equipped)

You can keep beverage cans or other items warm or cool using the open/close lever of the vent installed in the glove box.

1. Turn on the fan control switch of the climate control system.
2. Set the air flow control to the any mode.
3. Move the open/close lever (1) of the vent installed in the glove box to the open (position.
4. Set the temperature control to warm or cool.
   When the cool box is not used, turn the lever to the close (O) position.

\*NOTICE

Whilst using the cooling function, a small amount of condensed moisture could damage pieces of paper.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, pull the cover. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out. The cover will close when released.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder whilst the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder to prevent breakage or deformation of glasses. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

Top-down view of a car's rear intake structure showing internal compartments and structural elements (no text or symbols)

Luggage box (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

To open the cover, grasp the handle on the top of the cover and lift it.

* The actual feature may differ from the illustration.

INTERIOR FEATURES

LCD monitor (Clock and outside temperature) (if equipped)

The monitor displays the clock and outside temperature.

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock whilst driving. You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.

Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:

• H (Hour)

Press the "H" button to advance the time displayed by one hour.

• M (Minute)

Press the "M" button to advance the time displayed by one minute.

- Display conversion

To change the 12 hour format to the 24 hour format, press the "H" and "M" button simultaneously for more than 4 seconds. For example, if the "H" and "M" button is pressed whilst the time is 10:15 p.m., the display will change to 22:15

■ Outside temperature

• Temperature unit conversion (°C↔°F)

To change the temperature unit, press the "H" and "M" button simultaneously for approximately 1 second.

The unit will change from °C (Centigrade) to °F (Fahrenheit) or from °F (Fahrenheit) to °C (Centigrade).

If your vehicle enters an icy road within an outside temperature range of -5^ to 3^ ( 23^ to 37^ ), the temperature digits will blink five times and the symbol (will illuminate.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a hand inserting a component (no visible text or symbols)

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the socket of the cigarette lighter. It may damage the cigarette lighter.

CAUTION

We recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. The use of plug-in accessories (shavers, handheld vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a cylindrical feature (no text or symbols visible)

OJC045193ROJC045182F

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.

WARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle's ashtrays as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

3D mechanical component diagram showing internal cavities and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups with hot liquid in the cup holder whilst the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of sudden stop or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder whilst the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a vehicle that is heated up. It may explode.

Top-down view of a car showing internal compartments and structural details, with an inset highlighting a yellow arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols present)

Bottle holder

Bottles may be placed in the holder.

\*NOTICE

Only bottles should be placee in the holder as it is written in the vehicle "BOTTLE ONLY".

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side.

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and open the mirror cover (2).

To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it on. (if equipped)

\*NOTICE

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

CAUTION - Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.

WARNING

For your safety, do not obstruct your vision when using the sunvisor.

* To learn how to use the vanity mirror lamp, refer to "Interior light" in this section.

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

Aux, USB and iPod® port (if equipped)

You can use an AUX port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also in an iPod® port.

\*NOTICE

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an inset close-up showing a highlighted part (no visible text or symbols)

Shopping bag holder (if equipped)

CAUTION

Do not hang a bag weighing more than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause damage to the shopping bag holder.

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a circular inset highlighting a small feature (no text or symbols visible)

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.

Close-up of a mechanical component labeled 'Type A' with a magnified inset showing a knob detail (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Close-up of a mechanical component labeled Type B with a knob and a circular mark, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothe pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends that only the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Top-down view of a car's backrest with mesh grille and side-mounted sensors (no text or symbols visible)

Luggage net holder

To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the 4 holders located in the cargo area (under the floor panel) to attach the luggage net.

If your vehicle is equipped with a luggage board, set the board to the lower position before installing the luggage net.

If necessary, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net's recoil path. DO NOT use when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

Luggage board

Two (Upper/Lower) modes are provided to enable you to use the cargo area as you like.

• Lower mode: Creates maximum cargo space.
  • Upper mode: May be used with the rear seatbacks folded.

Top-down view of a car rear bumper with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

To use as upper mode:

1. Fold the board and slide it rearwards.

Top-down view of a car's rear bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

1. Lift the folded board to the upper support.
2. Slide the board forward and unfold.

To use as lower mode:

Follow the procedure in reverse order shown in upper mode.

CAUTION

Do not place luggage that weighs more than 60kg (132lbs.) in the upper mode and make sure the luggage does not move around the cargo area.

AUDIO SYSTEM

\*NOTICE

• If you install an after market HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow circular motion indicator (no text or symbols)

Antenna

Roof antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM signals. This antenna can be removed. To remove the antenna, turn it counter clockwise, To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened to ensure proper reception.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

Audio remote control (if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control switch is installed to promote safe driving.

CAUTION

Do not operate the audio remote control switches simultaneously.

VOL (+ / -) (1)

• Press the lever upward (+☐) to increase the volume.
• Press the lever downward (−) to decrease the volume.

SEEK (∧) (2y)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions based on the system mode. For the following functions the button should be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button.

CD/USB/ iPod® mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons.

CD/USB/iPod® mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio or CD (compact disc).

MUTE (4)

• Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.

FM reception

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM reception

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Unobstructed area"]
    C --> D["Iron bridges"]
    D --> E["Road with a question mark"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station.

Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

- Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

- Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

JBM005JBM004JBM

- Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

- Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

Using a mobile phone or a two-way radio

When a mobile phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the mobile phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

CAUTION

When using a communication system such a mobile phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a mobile phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a mobile phone whilst driving. Stop at a safe location to use a mobile phone.

Caring for disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too high, open the car windows to ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged, hold CDs by the edges or the centre hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback (wipe it from the centre to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.

• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or making and recording methods. In such circumstances, continued use may cause malfunctions to your audio system.

\*NOTICE

- Playing an incompatible copy protected audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not comply with international audio CD standards (Red Book), may not play on your car audio. Please note that inabilities to properly play a copy protected CD may indicate that the CD is defective, not the CD player.

\*NOTICE

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order: 60 sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
   * If no song file is contained in the folder, that folder is not displayed.

graph LR
    Root --> FolderA
    FolderA --> FolderAA
    FolderAA --> FolderABA
    FolderABB --> FolderBA
    FolderBA --> FolderBB

graph TD
    Root --> F0["Folder A"]
    F0 --> F1["Folder AA"]
    F1 --> F2["5"]
    F1 --> F3["6"]
    F1 --> F4["7"]
    F1 --> F5["Folder AB"]
    F5 --> F6["Folder ABA"]
    F6 --> F7["8"]
    F6 --> F8["9"]
    F6 --> F9["Folder ABB"]
    F9 --> F10["10"]
    F0 --> F10
    F1 --> F10
    F2 --> F10
    F3 --> F10
    F4 --> F10
    F5 --> F10
    F6 --> F10
    F7 --> F10
    F8 --> F10
    F9 --> F10
    F10 --> F10
    F1 --> F2
    F2 --> F2
    F3 --> F3
    F4 --> F4
    F5 --> F5
    F6 --> F6
    F7 --> F7
    F8 --> F8
    F9 --> F9
    F10 --> F10
    F2 --> F2
    F3 --> F3
    F4 --> F4
    F5 --> F5
    F6 --> F6
    F7 --> F7
    F8 --> F8
    F9 --> F9
    F10 --> F10

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen whilst driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.
• Using the phone whilst driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction.
  Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on. Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in battery discharge.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Driving whilst distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• Operating the device whilst driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause colour/quality deterioration

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
  • In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of purchase or After Service centre.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

\*NOTICE - USING THE USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned off whilst the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.
• The System may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.
  1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps \~ 320Kbps.
  2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps \~ 320Kbps.
  • Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g., Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle's audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
  • Devices such as MP3 Player/Mobile phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported. (i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.
  • Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• The data in the USB memory may be lost whilst using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or mobile phone accessories as they could call to the USB jack. Please tain only to use plug typ products.

\*NOTICE - USING THE iPod® DEVICE

- Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and files may not properly play.

Supported iPod® models:

• iPod® Mini
• iPod® 4th(Photo) \~ 6th(Classic) generation
• iPod® Nano 1st\~4th generation

• iPod® Touch 1st\~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod® can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

• If the iPod ^ disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod ^ . (Reset: Refer to iPod ^ manual)
• An iPod ^ may not operate normally on low battery.
• Some iPod ^ devices, such as the iPhone, can be connected through the Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• To use iPod® features within the audio, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod® device.
• Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone, select the Dock connector or Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source).
• When connecting iPod ^ with the iPod ^ Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod ^ and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod® and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod ^ when adjusting the audio system's volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod ^ .
• When not using iPod® with car audio, detach the iPod® cable from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

\*NOTICE - USING THE Bluetooth® Wireless Technology MOBILE PHONE

- Do not use a mobile phone or perform Bluetooth® Wireless Technology settings (e.g. pairing a phone) whilst driving.

- Some Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology enabled phones may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system.

- Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features of the audio system, refer your phone's User's Manual for phone-side Bluetooth® Wireless Technology operations.

- The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features.

- You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the mobile service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the mobile phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system or mobile service stations can be disturbed.
• Whilst a phone is connected through Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth ^ Wireless Technology-related operations.
• Some mobile phones or other devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the condition.
  • Phone contact names should be saved in English or they may not be displayed correctly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection, turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature off.
• The hands-free call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone type.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features can be used only when the mobile phone has been paired and connected with the device. For more information on pairing and connecting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phones, refer to the "Phone Setup" section. (Continued)

(Continued)

• When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone is connected, a (icon) icon will appear at the top of the screen. If a (icon) is not displayed, this indicates that a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled device has not been connected. You must connect the device before use. For more information on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phones, refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phone will work only when the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology option within your mobile phone has been turned on. (Methods of turning on the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled feature may differ depending on the mobile phone.)
• In some mobile phones, starting the ignition whilst talking through Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled handsfree call will result in the call becoming disconnected. (Switch the call back to your mobile phone when starting the ignition.)
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Some features may not be supported in some Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone and devices.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled operation may be unstable depending on the communication state.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

\*NOTICE - USING VOICE COMMAND

• The voice recognition feature of this product supports recognition of the commands listed within this user's manual.
• Whilst using voice recognition, operating the steering remote control or the device will terminate voice recognition and allow you to manually operate desired functions.

• Position the microphone above the head of the driver's seat. For superior performance, maintain good posture when saying voice commands.
  • Voice recognition may not function properly due to outside noise. The following conditions can affect the performance of Voice Recognition:

• When the windows and sunroof are open

• When the heating/cooling system is on
• When passing a tunnel
• When driving on rugged and uneven roads

(Continued)

(Continued)

• After downloading Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone book, the system requires some times to convert the phone book into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not operate properly.
• Upon inputting your phone book, special symbols and numbers cannot be recognized by voice. For example, “# John Doe%&” will be recognized as “John Doe”.

■ CD Player

*No ⑧Bluetobite shown if the

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS

* Display and settings may differ depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit

1.

- Ejects the disc.

1. RADIO

- Changes to FM/AM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → FMA → AM → AMA.

1. (ped)

2. Operates Phone Screen.
   * When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

4. MEDIA

• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode.
  • Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

• SEEK TRACK

• Radio Mode: Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
  • CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file).

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

1. PWR/VOL knob

2. Power Knob:Turns power On/ Off by pressing the knob.
   • Volume Knob: Sets volume by turning the knob left/right.

3. \~ 61 (Preset)

4. Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels).
   • CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode

5. 1 RPT :
   Repeat

6. 2 RDM :
   Random

- In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

8.

• Each time the button is shortly pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off → Screen On → Screen Off.
* Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

9.

TASCAN

- Radio Mode

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): TA On/Off

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

• Media mode

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.
  * Press and holding the key again to continue listening to the current song (file).

10.

- Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone, System setting modes.

11. MENU

• Displays menus for the current mode.
  * iPod® List : Move to parent category.

12. √FLDR ∧

- MP3 CD/USB mode : Folder Search.

13. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode: Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.
  When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

Audio Head Unit

■ Type A-2

14. FM

- Changes to FM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode changed in order of FM1 → FM2 → FMA.

15. AM

• Changes to AM mode.

- Each time the key is pressed, the mode changed in order of AM → AMA.

16. MEDIA

- Changes to CD, USB(iPo®), AUX mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX.

17. SEEK TRACK

• Radio Mode: Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod ^ modes

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file).

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

18. \~ 61 (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels).
• CD, USB, iPod ^ mode

- 1 RPT :

Repeat

- 2 RDM :

Random

- In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

19. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod® mode: Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.
  When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the ☐lect [Display] through ⓊTUNE knob or k 1 RPT Select menu through ⓊTUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes selection mode

- During On state, press the RADIO MEDIA key to display the mode change pop up screen.

Scroll text

[Scroll text] Set / On Off

• On : Maintains scroll

• : scrolls only one (1) time.

Song Info

When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from 'Folder/File' or 'Album/Artist/Song'.

Sound Settings

Press the ⚙️ key Select [Sound] through ⓉTUNE knob or k2 RDM Select menu through ⓉTUNE knob

Audio Settings

This menu allows you to set the 'Bass, Middle, Treble' and the Sound Fader and Balance.

Select [Audio Settings] ▶ Select menu through ○ TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
  * Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-pressing the ⒽTUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] ▶ Turn SDVC On/Off by pressing the ○ TUNE knob

Volume Dialogue (if equipped)

Adjusts voice recognition volume. Select [Volume Dialogue] ▶ Set volume of Ⓞ TUNE knob

Phone Settings (if equipped)

Press the ☑ Select [Phone] through ⒽTUNE knob or k 3 Select menu through ⒽTUNE knob

Pair Phone

CAUTION

To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phone, authentication and connection processes are first required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone whilst driving the vehicle. First park your vehicle before use.

Select [Pair Phone] ▶ Set through ● TUNE knob

① Search for device names as displayed on your mobile phone and connect.
② Input the passkey displayed on the screen. (Passkey : 0000)
* The device name and passkey will be displayed on the screen for up to 3 minutes. If pairing is not completed within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone pairing process will automatically be cancelled.
③ Pairing completion is displayed.

* In some mobile phones, pairing will automatically be followed by connection.
* It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phones.

Phone List

The names of up to 5 paired phones will be displayed.

A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently connected phone.

Select the desired name to setup the selected phone.

- Connecting a phone

Select [Phone List] ▶ Select mobile phone through ⒹUNE knob Select [Connect Phone]

① Select a mobile phone that is not currently connected.
② Connect the selected mobile phone.
③ Connection completion is displayed.
* If a phone is already connected, disconnect the currently connected phone and select a new phone to connect.

- Disconnecting a connected phone Select [Phone List] ▶ Select mobile phone through ⓄUNE knob Select [Disconnect Phone]

① Select the currently connected mobile phone.
② Disconnect the selected mobile phone.
③ Disconnection completion is displayed.

- Changing connection sequence (Priority)

This is used to change the order (priority) of automatic connection for the paired mobile phones.

Select [Phone List] ▶ Select [Priority] through ⒽUNE knob Select No. 1 Priority mobile phone

① Select [Priority].
② From the paired phones, select the phone desired for No.1 priority.
③ The changed priority sequence is displayed.
* Once the connection sequence (priority) is changed, the new no. 1 priority mobile phone will be connected.

- When the no. 1 priority cannot be connected: Automatically attempts to connect the most recently connected phone.

- Cases when the most recently connected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the order in which paired phones are listed.

- The connected phone will automatically be changed to No. 1 priority.

- Delete

Select [Phone List] ▶ Select mobile phone through ⒽUNE knob Select [Delete]

① Select the desired mobile phone.
② Delete the selected mobile phone.
③ Deletion completion is displayed.
* When attempting to delete a currently connected phone, the phone is first disconnected.

CAUTION

• When you delete a mobile phone, the mobile phone phone book will also be erased.
• For stable Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication, delete the mobile phone from the audio and also delete the audio from your mobile phone.

Phone book Download

This feature is used to download phone book and call histories into the audio system.

Select [Phone book Download] ▶ Select through Ⓗ TUNE knob

CAUTION

• The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.
• If a different operation is performed whilst phone book is being downloaded, downloading will be discontinued. Phone book already downloaded will be saved.
• When downloading new phone book, delete all previously saved phone book before starting download.

Auto Download

When connecting a mobile phone, it is possible to automatically download new phone book and Call Histories.

Select [Auto Download] ▶ Set / On Off through ○ TUNE knob

Audio Streaming

Songs (files) saved in your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phone can be played through the audio system.

Select [Audio Streaming] ▶ Set / On Off through ○ TUNE knob

CAUTION

The Bluetooth ^® Wireless Technology audio streaming feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.

Outgoing Volume

This is used to set the volume of your voice as heard by the other party whilst on a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled handsfree call.

Select [Outgoing Volume] ▶ Set volume through Ⓗ TUNE knob

※ Even whilst on a call, the volume can be changed by using the TRACK key.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology System Off

This feature is used when you do not wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system.

Select [Bluetooth System Off] ▶Set through ○TUNE knob

If a phone is already connected, disconnect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system off.

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology System

To use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology when the system is currently off, follow these next steps.

- Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Technology through the

Press the 📄 Screen Guidance

* Moves to the screen where Bluetooth® Wireless Technology functions can be used and displays guidance.

- Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Technology through the 🎨

Press the ⚙ lect [Phone] through Ⓤ TUNE knob or key 3

① A screen asking whether to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will be displayed.

② On the screen, select to ESRn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and display guidance.

* If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system is turned on, the system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.

CAUTION

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection may become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow these next steps to try again.

1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function within the mobile phone ON/OFF and try to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power ON/OFF and try to connect again.
3) Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in your mobile phone and the audio system and pair again for use.

System Settings

Press the ☐ Select [System] through tune knob or (Type A-1) 4 key / (Type A-2) 3 Select menu through ⬤ TUNE knob

Memory Information (if equipped)

Displays currently used memory and total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK The currently used memory is displayed on the left side whilst the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

VRS Mode (if equipped)

This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes.

Select [VRS Mode] Set through TONE knob

- Normal : This mode is for beginner users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

• Expert : This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instructions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
  * May differ depending on the selected audio.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language.

Select [Language] ▶ Set through ⒹUNE knob

* The system will reboot after the language is changed.
Language support by region - Deutsch, English(UK), Français, Italiano, Español, Nederlands, Svenska, Dansk, Русский, Polski, Türkçe

RADIO

Changing RADIO mode

FM1

87.50 P1

SEEK

Press the √ SEEK TRACK^

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.

Preset SEEK

Press 1 6 key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key 1 fr 6 save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the SCAN

- Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast frequency.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the ⒹTUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

Traffic Announcement (TA)

Shortly pressing the SCAN key (under 0.8 seconds): Set On/Off TA Traffic Announcement) mode.

MENU

Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

AST (Auto Store)

Press the MENU key ▶Set [ 7AST] through ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT key.

Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequencies with superior reception to presets 1 \~ 6 If no frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

* Saves only to the Preset memory 1 \~ 6 of FMA or AMA mode.

AF (Alternative Frequency)

Press the MENU Set [ AF] through ⓊTUNE knob or ke 2 ROM

The Alternative Frequency option can be turned On/Off.

Region

Press the MENU et [Region] ③ through ⒽTUNE knob or key 3

The Region option can be turned On/Off.

News

Press the MENU set [ News] 4 through ⒽTUNE knob or key 4

The News option can be turned On/Off.

Info Volume

Info Volume refers to the sound volume upon receiving News or Traffic information.

The info volume can be controlled by turning the ⓂOL knob left/right whilst a news or traffic broadcast is playing.

* AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio menus.

BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPod® / My Music (if equipped)

Press the MEDIA change the mod mode in order of

(Type A-1) CD → USB (iPod®) → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.

(Type A-2) CD → USB(iPod®) → AUX.

The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

* The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.
* The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Repeat

Whilst song (file) is playing ▶ 1 RPT (RPT) key

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode: RPT on screen

- To repeat one song (Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen

- To repeat folder (pressing twice): repeats all files within the current folder.

* Press the 1 RPT gain to turn off repeat.

Random

Whilst song (file) is playing ▶ 2 RDM (RDM) key

Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on screen

- Random (Shortly pressing the key): Plays all songs in random order.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen

• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the key): Plays all files within the current folder in random order.
  MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on screen
• Random (pressing twice): Plays all files in random order.
  iPod® mode: RDM on screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key): Plays all files in random order.
  * Press the 2 RDM gain to turn off repeat.

Changing Song/File

Whilst song (file) is playing ▶ SEEK TRACK key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Plays the current song from the beginning.
  If the SEEK TRACK pressed again within 1 second, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
  Whilst song (file) is playing ▶ SEEK TRACK ^ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the song.

Scan

Whilst song (file) is playing ▶ SCAN key

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting from the next song.
  * Pressing and holding the again to turn off.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB Mode

Whilst file is playing (F FLDR Up) key

• Searches the next folder.
  Whilst file is playing (F FLDR Down) key
  • Searches the parent folder.
  If a folder is selected by pressing the TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.
  * In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent Folder.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning ⒽTUNE knob : Searches for songs (files)
• Pressing Ⓐ TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

MENU : Audio CD

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU set the Repeat, Random, Information features.

Repeat

Press the MENU set [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT to repeat the current song.

* Press RPT again to turn off.

Random

Press the MENU set [ RDM] ② through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM p randomly play songs within the current folder.

* Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [ info] ③ through the TUNE knob or 3 b display information of the current song. ✦ Press the MENU turn off info display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat

Press the MENU set [ RPT] ① through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT to repeat the current song.

* Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random

Press the MENU key ▶ Set [2RDM] through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM randomly play songs within the current folder.

* Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the MENU set [ R.RPT] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key to repeat songs within the current folder. ✦ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the MENU Set [A.RDM]4 through the ○ TUNE knob or 4 randomly play all songs within the CD. ✦ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [ Info] through the ○ TUNE knob or 5 to display information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Copy (if equipped)

Press the MENU Set [ Copy] through the ⒽTUNE knob or key 6

This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

If another key is pressed whilst copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

* If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX) whilst copying is in progress, copying is cancelled.

* Music will not be played whilst copying is in progress.

MENU : iPod®

In iPod® mode, press the MENU set the Repeat, Album Random, All Random, Information and Search features.

Repeat

Press the MENU key ▶ Set [RPT] through the ○ TUNE knob or 1 RPT to repeat the current song.

* Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU key ▶ Set [2RDM] through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key. Plays albums within the currently playing category in random order.

* Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [ Info] ③ through the ○ TUNE knob or 3 key. Displays information of the current song.

* Press the MENU turn off info display.

Search

Press the MENU key ▶ Set [Search] through the ○ TUNE knob or 4 key. Displays iPod® category list.

* Searching iPod® category is MENU key pressed, move to parent category.

MENU : My Music Mode (if equipped)

In My Music mode, press the MENU to set the Repeat, Random, Information, Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection features.

Repeat

Press the MENU set [ RPT] ① through the ⒶUNE knob or ke 1 RPT Repeats the currently playing song. ✦ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the MENU Set [ RDM] ② through the TUNE knob or ke2 RDM Plays all songs in random order. ✦ Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the MENU Set [info] ③ through the TUNE knob or key 3 Displays information of the current song. ✦ Press the MENU key to turn off info display.

Delete

Press the MENU key ▶ Set [ Delete ] through the 📊UNE knob or 4 key. Deletes currently playing file In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list

① Select the file you wish to delete by using the ⓂUNE knob. ② Press the MENU key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All

Press the MENU key Set [D6].All] through the TUNE knob or 5 key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection

Press the MENU et [Del.Sel] 6 through the ⒹUNE knob or ke 6 Songs within My Music are selected and deleted.

① Select the songs you wish to delete from the list.

② After selecting, press the MENU and select the delete menu.

\*NOTICE - USING THE My Music

• Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.
- Memory info can be checked in the System menu of Setup.

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA currently connected with the AUX terminal. AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you can also press the MEDIA change to AUX mode.

* AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

\*NOTICE - USING THE AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO (if equipped)

What is Bluetooth® Wireless Technology?

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is a wireless technology that allows multiple devices to be connected in a short range, low-powered devices like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless remote controller, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the [Audio Streaming] of Phone is turned On.

Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Streaming : Press the key Select through the tune knob Select [Audio Streaming] through the TUNE knob Set On / Off

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio

• Press the MEDIA change the mode in order of CD → USB → AUX → My Music → BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio will start playing.
  * Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features

- Play / Pause Press the Ⓐ TUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

* The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phone. When it is not supported, no title / no artist will be displayed.

- Previous / Next song Press 🧑 SEEK TRACK or 🧑 SEEK TRACK to play previous or next song. ※ The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

PHONE (if equipped)

Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone features

• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology power to OFF.

Making a call using the Steering remote controller (VOICE COMMAND equipped model)

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.
2. ☐ on : Activates voice recognition.
3. ☐ on : Places and transfers calls.

4. ☐ on : Ends calls or cancels functions.

5. Check call history and making call
   ① Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.
   ② The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
   ③ Press the 📄 again to connect a call to the selected number.
   • Redialing the most recently called number
   ① Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key on the steering remote controller.
   ② The most recently called number is redialed.

Making a call using the Steering remote controller

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a digital display showing the control panel (no text or symbols visible)

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

Phone MENU (if equipped)

Press the 📞 display three menus (Call History, Phone Book, Phone Setup).

Call history

Press the 📊it [ History] ① through the ⓄUNE knob or ke1 RPT

The call history is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)

Phone Book

Press the C key ▶ Set [2P. Book] through the ○ TUNE knob or 2 RDM key. The phone book is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call.

* If more than one number is saved to one contact, then a screen showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is displayed. Select the desired number to make the call.

If phone book do not exist, a screen asking whether to download phone book is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)

Phone Setup

Press the C key ▶ Set [ 3 Setup] through the DUNE knob or key 3 The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to "Phone Setup".

VOICE COMMAND (if equipped)

Starting Voice Command

• To start voice command, shortly press the 📄 on the steering wheel remote controller.
• If voice command is in [Normal Mode], then the system will say "Please say a command. Beep"
  * If voice command is in [Expert Mode], then the system will only say a "Beep-"

* Setting Voice command [Normal Mode]/[Expert Mode]:

Press the Select
[System] through the ⒷTUNE knob
or 4 y Select [VRS Mode]
through the ⒽTUNE knob Set
[Normal Mode] / [Expert Mode]

- Say the voice command.

\* NOTICE

For proper voice recognition, say the voice command after the guidance message and the "Beep" sound.

Skipping the Guidance Message

Whilst the guidance message is being stated, shortly press the 🔊 key (under 0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance message and sound the “beep”.

After the "beep", say the voice command.

Ending Voice Command

• Whilst using voice command, press and hold the 🔔 key (over 0.8 seconds) to end voice command.
• Whilst using voice command, pressing the steering wheel remote controller or a different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting for your voice command, say "cancel" or "end" to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting for your voice command, shortly press the 🔊 key (under 0.8 seconds) to end voice command.

* Illustration on using voice commands

- Starting voice command.

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

• Skipping Voice Recognition

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

• End voice command.

Shortly pressing the 📄 (under 0.8 seconds):

Voice Command List

- Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be supported in special circumstances.)

Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode.
Callssaved in phone book Ex) Call “John”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say “Call History”, “Phone book”, “Dial Number” to execute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book	Displays the phone book screen. After saying this command, say the name of a phone book saved in the phone book to automatically connect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number what you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio	When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1→ FM2→ FMA → AM → AMA)When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played radio screen.

Command Function
FM	When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state.When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)	Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)	Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA	Displays the FMA screen.
AM	Displays the AM screen.
AMA	Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6	Plays the most recently played broadcast saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6	Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9	Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
AM 530~1710	Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding frequency.
TA on	Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off	Disable Traffic Announcement
News on	Enable RDS News feature
News off	Disable RDS News feature
Media Moves to	the most recently played media screen.
Play Track 1~30	If a music CD has been inserted, plays the corresponding track.
CD Plays the music	saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves	to the CD track or file selection screen.For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the track number to play the corresponding track.Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After manually operate the device to select and play music.
USB Plays USB	music.
Search USB Moves	to USB file selection screen. After manually operate the device to select and play music.
iPod®	Plays iPod®music.
Search iPod®	Moves to the iPod®file selection screen. After, manually operate the device to select and play music.
My Music	Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music	Moves to My Music file selection screen. After manually operate the device to select and play music.

Command	Function
AUX (Auxiliary)	Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth Audio	Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device.
Mute	Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon?	Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit)	Ends voice command.

- FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used whilst listening to FM, AM radio.

Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays	the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast frequencies with superior reception and saves in Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6	Saves the current broadcast frequency to Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most recently selected preset. (Example:When currently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no. 4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset	Selects the preset number previous to the most recently selected preset. (Example: When currently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan	Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan	Moves to the next preset from the current present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on	Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off	Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region	Enable Region feature

- Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used whilst listening to Audio CD.

Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Random	Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off	Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.
Repeat	Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Next Track	Plays the next track.
Previous Track	Plays the previous track.
Scan	Scans the tracks from the next track for 10 seconds each.
Track 1~30	Plays the desired track number.
Search Track	Moves to the track selection screen. After, say the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information	Displays the information screen of the current track.

- MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used whilst listening to music files saved in CD and USB.

Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each.
Search File	Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder	Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information	Displays the information screen of the current file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.

- iPod® Commands: Commands that can be used whilst playing iPod®.

Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.
Next Song	Plays the next song.
Previous Song	Plays the previous song.
Search Song	Moves to the song selection screen.
Information	Displays the information screen of the current song.

Features of your vehicle

- My Music Commands: Commands that can be used whilst playing My Music.

Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.
Delete All	Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands: Commands that can be used whilst playing Phone Music.

Command Function
Play	Plays the currently paused song.
Pause	Pauses the current song.

	Before driving / 5-3Key positions / 5-5Engine start/stop button / 5-9ISG (Idle stop and go) system / 5-15Manual transaxle / 5-19Automatic transaxle / 5-22Brake system / 5-28Cruise control system / 5-38Speed limit control system / 5-43Economical operation / 5-45Special driving conditions / 5-47
Driving your vehicle
	Winter driving / 5-53Trailer towing / 5-57Vehicle weight / 5-65

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment, move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.

- Never inhale exhaust gas.

Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

- Exhaust System Maintenance.

Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.

- Confined Areas.

Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.

- Prolonged Idling.

If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the "Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.

- Load Carrying.

If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the tailgate door to be fully closed, the side windows must remain closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.

To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by snow leaves etc.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tyres.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in section 7, "Maintenance".

WARNING

Driving whilst distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.
  For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING

All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to "Seat belts" in section 3 for more information on their proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving whilst under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a cab.

WARNING

• When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep all things in the vehicle safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or heater. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive safely.

KEY POSITIONS

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular dial and central hole (no text or symbols visible)

Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position. The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch position LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.

\*NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key whilst turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.

WARNING - Ignition switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1^st gear for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for the automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.
  (Continued)

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ignition switch, or any other controls through the steering wheel whilst the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects around the driver's seat as they may move whilst driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if equipped).
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel is released when the rpm is high.

\*NOTICE - Full throttle resistor (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a resistor in the accelerator pedal, it prevents you from driving at full throttle unintentionally by making the driver require increased effort to depress the accelerator pedal. However, if you depress the pedal more than approximately 80%, the vehicle can be at full throttle and the accelerator pedal will be easier to depress. This is not a malfunction but a normal condition.

Starting the petrol engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and leave the shift lever at Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed whilst turning the ignition switch to the start position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

1. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

It should be started without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1. Do not wait for the engine to warm up whilst the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine speeds.(Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position whilst the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position with the engine running. It may damage the starter.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated before starting the engine and then have to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and leave the shift lever at Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed whilst turning the ignition switch to the start position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P(park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.

Glow indicator light

Abstract black line drawing resembling a stylized 'w' or infinity symbol (no text or symbols present)

W-60

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. Then the glow indicator light will illuminate.
2. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn the ignition switch to the START position and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

\*NOTICE

If the engine does not start within 10 seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once more to the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and then to the ON position, in order to preheat again.

Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting.
   If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning it off.
   This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbocharger unit.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button

Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed. It will also go off immediately when the theft-alarm system is armed.

ENGINE START/STOP button position

OFF

Not illuminated

With manual transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop the vehicle then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

With automatic transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

Vehicle equipped with anti-theft steering column lock

The steering wheel locks when the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the OFF position to protect you against theft. It locks when the door is opened.

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound. Try locking the steering wheel again. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the OFF position after the driver's door is opened, the steering wheel will not lock and the warning chime will sound. In such a situation, close the door. Then the steering wheel will lock and the warning chime will stop.

\*NOTICE

If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the ENGINE START/STOP button will not work. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

CAUTION

You are able to turn off the engine (START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON), only when the vehicle is not in motion. In an emergency situation whilst the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

ACC(Accessory)

Orange indicator

With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.

With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped with anti-theft steering column lock) and electrical accessories are operational. If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour, the button turns off automatically to prevent battery discharge.

ON

Blue indicator

With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button when the button is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.

With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position for a long time. The battery may discharge, because the engine is not running.

START/RUN

Not illuminated

With manual transaxle

To start the engine, depress the clutch pedal and brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP with the shift lever in the Neutral position.

With automatic transaxle

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

\*NOTICE

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal for manual transaxle vehicles or without depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not start and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes as follow:

OFF → ACC → ON → OFF or ACC

\*NOTICE

If you leave the ENGINE START/ STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING

- Never press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst the vehicle is in motion. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

- The anti-theft steering column lock (if equipped) is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P (Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Never reach for the ENGINE START/STOP button or any other controls through the steering wheel whilst the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in the area could cause loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

- Do not place any movable objects around the driver's seat as they may move whilst driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.

Starting the engine

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if equipped).
- Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.
- Wait until the engine rpm is normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel is released when the rpm is high.

\*NOTICE - Full throttle resistor (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a resistor in the accelerator pedal, it prevents you from driving at full throttle unintentionally by making the driver require increased effort to depress the accelerator pedal. However, if you depress the pedal more than approximately 80%, the vehicle can be at full throttle and the accelerator pedal will be easier to depress. This is not a malfunction but a normal condition.

Starting the petrol engine (if equipped)

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed whilst starting the engine.
   Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.
   You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
   It should be started without depressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm up whilst the vehicle remains stationary.
   Start driving at moderate engine speeds.(Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

Starting the diesel engine (if equipped)

To start the diesel engine when the engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated before starting the engine and then have to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed whilst pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button to the START position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

Glow indicator light

Abstract black line drawing resembling a stylized 'w' or infinity symbol (no text or symbols present)

W-60

1. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button whilst depressing the brake pedal.
2. Continue depressing the brake pedal until the illuminated glow indicator goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
3. The engine starts running when the glow indicator goes off.

\*NOTICE

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once more whilst the engine is pre-heating, the engine may start.

Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine immediately after starting.
   If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving, requiring a heavy engine load, idle the engine about 1 minute before turning it off.
   This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the engine off.

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to a heavy load. Doing so may cause severe damage to the engine or turbocharger unit.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start.
- When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if any door is opened, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, a message "Key is not in the vehicle" will appear on the LCD display. And if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or warning will turn off whilst the vehicle is moving. Always have the smart key with you.

WARNING

The engine will start, only when the smart key is in the vehicle. Never allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle touch the ENGINE START/STOP button or related parts.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If the traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position whilst the vehicle is still moving and press the ENGINE START/STOP button in an attempt to restart the engine.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the main subject)

\*NOTICE

• If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button directly with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can not start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for 10 seconds whilst it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

CAUTION

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ISG system, which reduces fuel consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill. (For example: red light, stop sign and traffic jam)

The engine starts automatically as soon as the starting conditions are met.

The ISG system is ON whenever the engine is running.

\*NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

OJC050032 OJC050038

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode

1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will stop and the green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will illuminate. If your vehicle is equipped with a supervision cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

NOTICE

• You must reach a speed of at least 6 mph (10 km/h) since last idle stop.
• If you unfasten the seat belt or open the driver's door (engine bonnet) in auto stop mode, the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and ISG system is deactivated. If your vehicle is equipped with a supervision cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine manually.

Auto start

To restart the engine from idle stop mode

- Press the clutch pedal when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position. The engine will start and the green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will go out.

The engine will also restart automatically without the driver's any actions if the following occurs:

• The fan speed of manual climate control system is set above the 3rd position when the air conditioning is on.
• The fan speed of automatic climate control system is set above the 6th position when the air conditioning is on.
• When a certain amount of time has passed with the climate control system on.
• When the defroster is on.
• The brake vaccum pressure is low.
• The battery charging status is low.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).

The green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will blink for 5 seconds and the notice will illuminate on the LCD display (if equipped).

Condition of ISG system operation

The ISG system will operate under the following condition:

• The driver's seat belt is fastened.
• The driver's door and bonnet are closed.
• The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.
• The battery is sufficiently charged.
• The outside temperature is between 2^ C to 35^ C.
• The engine coolant temperature is not too low.

OJC050034 OJC

\*NOTICE

• If the ISG system does not meet that operation condition, the ISG system is deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and the notice will illuminate on the LCD display (if equipped).
• If the light or notice comes on continuously, please check the operation condition.

ISG system deactivation

• If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and the notice will illuminate on the LCD display (if equipped).
• If you press the ISG OFF button again, the system will be activated and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

ISG system malfunction

The system may not operate when:

- The ISG related sensors or system error occurs.

The yellow AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will stay on after blinking for 5 seconds and the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate. If your vehicle is equipped with a supervision cluster, the notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

\*NOTICE

- If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off by pressing the ISG OFF button again or if the ISG system continuously does not work correctly, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- When the ISG OFF button light comes on, it may stop illuminating after driving your vehicle at approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum of two hours and setting the fan speed control knob below the 2nd position. If the ISG OFF button light continues to illuminate in spite of the procedure, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

When the engine is in Idle Stop mode, it's possible to restart the engine without the driver taking any action.

Before leaving the car or doing anything in the engine room area, stop the engine by turning the ignition switch to the LOCK(OFF) position or removing the ignition key.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The shift lever can be moved without pulling the button (1).

The button (1) must be pulled up whilst moving the shift lever.

OED050001

* The actual shift lever in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 5 (6, if equipped) forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

Depress the clutch pedal down fully whilst shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock system, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must return to the Neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse). The button (1) located immediately below the shift knob must be pulled upward whilst moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse). Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION

- When downshifting from 5th (Fifth) gear to 4th (Fourth) gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently move the shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such overrevving of the engine may possibly cause engine and transaxle damage.

- Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transaxle.

• During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st (First) or R (Reverse), leave the shift lever at Neutral position and release the clutch. Depress the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st (First) or R (Reverse) gear position.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don't use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, whilst waiting for a traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.
• When operating the clutch pedal, press the clutch pedal down fully. If you don't press the clutch pedal fully, the clutch may be damaged or noise may occur.
• To prevent possible damage to the clutch system, do not start with the 2nd (second) gear engaged except when you start on a slippery road.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver's seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st (First) gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle not equipped with a ignition lock switch, it may move and cause a serious accident when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal whilst the parking brake is released and the shift lever not in the Neutral position.
• Do not use the engine brake (shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads.
  The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released whilst driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traffic or whilst driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labour. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you need to increase your speed again. When the vehicle is travelling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse). The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into R (Reverse), depress the clutch, move the shift lever to Neutral, then shift to the R (Reverse) position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.
- Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
- Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
- The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
- Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over-steers to re-enter the roadway.
- In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
- Never exceed posted speed limits.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

Move shift lever.

OJC055041R

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

\*NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic transaxle

• Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
- Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.
- Do not use the engine brake (shifting from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads.
The vehicle may slip causing an accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.
- When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
- Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

Transaxle ranges

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P (Park) position and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in a vehicle.

CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) whilst the vehicle is in motion.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R (Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in motion, except as explained in "Rocking the vehicle" in this section.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not locked. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

WARNING

Do not drive with the shift lever in N (Neutral).

The engine brake will not work and lead to an accident.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress the accelerator fully. The transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear (or gears, as appropriate).

Diagram of a car gear shift lever mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

OJC055042R

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate. In Sports Mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions.

• (Up) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.
• (Down) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

\*NOTICE

• Only the six forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches the red zone the transaxle will upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to + (Up) or - (Down) position, the transaxle may not make the requested gear change if the next gear is outside of the allowable engine rpm range. The driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine rpms below the red zone.
• When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the + (Up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the - (Down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condition.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and whilst shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which could injure persons in or around the car.

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, and then do the following:

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with labeled parts (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the screwdriver.
   5.Move the shift lever whilst holding down the screwdriver.
5. Remove the screwdriver from the shift-lock access hole then install the cap.
6. Depress the brake pedal, and then restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift-lock release, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer immediately.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
  • Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.
- Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
- Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
- The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
- Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.
- In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
- Never exceed posted speed limits.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward of backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start

To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator pedal gradually whilst releasing the service brakes.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING - Brakes

- Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

- Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly whilst maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

- Always, confirm the position of the brake and accelerator pedal before driving. If you don't check the position of the accelerator and brake pedal before driving, you may depress the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a serious accident.

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate whilst the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake whilst the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

Cross-sectional view of a mechanical assembly showing internal components and a yellow tag (no text or symbols)

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position for automatic transaxle vehicles.

CAUTION

• Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake whilst the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and make endanger driving safety.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) whilst pressing the button.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the shift lever instead of the parking brake. Set the parking brake AND make sure the shift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle equipped vehicles and in P (Park) for automatic transaxle equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

WK-23

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will illuminate when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released whilst the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution whilst operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) (if equipped)

WARNING

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving manoeuvres. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for vehicles equipped with an anti-lock braking system (or Electronic Stability Control System) may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• With tyre chains installed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS (or ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and operate your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

- Do not pump your brakes!

- Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) (if equipped)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering manoeuvres. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going.

ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

WARNING

Never drive too fast according to the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt manoeuvres and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding manoeuvres that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speed and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is functioning properly.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud or slippery road, depressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate.

ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tyre or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tyres, make sure they are the same size as your original tyres.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Control system is only a driving aid; use precautions for safe driving by slowing down on curved, snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and don't attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indicator light is blinking, or when the road surface is slippery.

\*NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a discharged battery, the ESC OFF indicator may illuminate. In this case, turn the steering wheel 360 degrees to the left and 360 degrees to the right whilst the ignition switch is in the ON position. Then, restart the engine after the ignition is off. If the ESC OFF indicator does not turn off, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• ESC should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off whilst driving, press the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a flat road surface.

WARNING

Never press ESC OFF button whilst ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off whilst ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated). If the ESC is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from increasing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation.

Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped)

Hill-start Assist Control is a function for your convenience. The main intention is to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards whilst driving uphill on an inclined surface. HAC holds the braking pressure built up by the driver whilst stopping for 2 seconds (manual transaxle) or 0.8 seconds (automatic transaxle) after releasing the brake pedal.

During the pressure-hold period, the driver has enough time to depress the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The braking pressure is reduced as soon as the system detects the driver's intention to drive.

WARNING

The HAC is usually activated only for 2 seconds (manual transaxle) or 0.8 seconds (automatic transaxle). The driver should be careful not to roll backward causing an accident with an object or person behind.

\*NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) (if equipped)

The Emergency Stop Signal system alerts the driver behind by blinking the stop light when the vehicle suddenly stops or when the ABS activates in a stop. (The system activates when the vehicle speed is over 55km/h and the vehicle deceleration is over 7m/s ^2 or the ABS activates when the vehicle emergency braking.)

When the vehicle speed is under 40 km/h and the ABS deactivates or the sudden stop situation is over, the stop light blinking will stop.

CAUTION

The Emergency Stop Signal system will not work if the hazard warning flasher is already on.

Good braking practices

• Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
  To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking operation returns to normal, to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking operation does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal whilst driving can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the kerb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the kerb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily whilst you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on an upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on, (CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only when driving on open highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system.

CAUTION

During cruise-speed driving with a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON-OFF switch.

\*NOTICE

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
  • To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Cruise control switch

O: Cancels cruise control operation.

: Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a close-up of the dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To set cruise control speed:

1. Press the cruise (ON/OFF) button on the steering wheel, to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

\*NOTICE - Manual transaxle (if equipped)

For manual transaxle vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

OJC050014OJC05009 C

1. Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator pedal at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly whilst going downhill.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To increase cruise control set speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up of the dashboard panel showing a yellow indicator (no text or symbols visible)

OJC050014OJC050013

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard with a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

OJC050012 OJC050013

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move up the lever (to RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.
- Depress the clutch pedal if equipped with a manual transaxle.
- Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with an automatic transaxle.
- Press the O (CANCEL) switch located on the steering wheel.
- Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/h).
- Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a highlighted control panel (no text or symbols visible)

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):

If any method other than the cruise (ON/OFF) switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever up (to RES+).

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Driving your vehicle

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

• Press the cruise (ON/OFF) button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
  Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in "To set cruise control speed" on the previous page.

SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

You can set the speed limit when you do not want to drive over a specific speed. If you drive over the preset speed limit, the warning system operates (set speed limit will blink and chime will sound) until the vehicle speed returns within the speed limit.

\*NOTICE

Whilst speed limit control is in operation, the cruise control system cannot be activated.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Speed limit control switch

O: Cancels set speed limit.

: Turns speed limit control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit control speed.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard, showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To set speed limit :

1. Press the speed limit (ON/OFF) button on the steering wheel, to turn the system on. The speed limit indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up of the dashboard panel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Move the lever down (to SET-).

2. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed will increase or decrease by 3 mph (5 km/h).

The set speed limit will display on the instrument cluster.

If you would like to drive over the preset speed limit when you depress the accelerator pedal less than approximately 50%, the vehicle speed will maintain within speed limit.

However if you depress the accelerator pedal more than approximately 70%, you can drive over the speed limit. Then the set speed limit will blink and chime will sound until you return the vehicle speed within the speed limit.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with two close-up insets showing control panel (no text or symbols visible)

To turn off the speed limit control, do one of the following:

• Press the speed limit (ON/OFF) switch once again.
• Press the cruise (ON/OFF) switch (If you press cruise switch, the cruise system will turn on)

If you press the O (CANCEL) switch once, the set speed limit will cancel, but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to reset the speed limit, move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) to the desired dpeed.

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (litre) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

- Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

- Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

- Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tyres. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tyre wear. Check the tyre pressures at least once a month.

- Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting kerbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tyre wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

- Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required.

- Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

- Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.

- Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

Driving your vehicle

• Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "labour" or "over-rev" the engine. Labouring is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer to perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect. In addition, turning off the ignition whilst driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING - Downshifting Downshifting with an automatic transaxle, whilst driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tyre speed could cause the tyres to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Multi Purpose Vehicle (MPV). MPV's have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher centre of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres, do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING - Rollover

As with other Multi Purpose Vehicle (MPV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
- Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher centre of gravity than ordinary vehicles.
- A MPV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional vehicles.
- Avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres.
- In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure everyone in the vehicle is properly buckled up.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with tyres designed to provide safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and type of tyre and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tyres, be sure to equip all four tyres with the tyre and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tyre/wheel combination not recommended by HYUNDAI for off road driving, you should not use these tyres for highway driving.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tyre damage.

WARNING - Spinning tyres Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 mph). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tyre to overheat which could result in tyre damage that may injure bystanders.

\*NOTICE

The ESC system (if equipped) should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward of backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

Black-and-white illustration of a car driving on a curved road with a traffic signpost nearby (no text or symbols on the car or road)

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tyre wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.

Driving your vehicle

- Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Black and white illustration of a sedan driving on a road with cloud patterns and raindrops (no text or symbols)

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you're not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windscreen wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windscreen wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windscreen.

• If your tyres are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tyres are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly whilst driving until normal braking operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Highway driving

Tyres

Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to specification. Low tyre inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tyres.

Avoid using worn or damaged tyres which may result in reduced traction or tyre failure.

\*NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tyre inflation pressure shown on the tyres.

WARNING

- Underinflated or overinflated tyres can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tyre failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. Always check tyres for proper inflation before driving. For proper tyre pressures, refer to "Tyres and wheels" in section 8.

- Driving on tyres with no or insufficient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tyres can result in loss of vehicle control, collisions, injury, and even death. Worn-out tyres should be replaced as soon as possible and should never be used for driving. Always check the tyre tread before driving your car. For further information and tread limits, refer to “Tyres and wheels” in section 7.

Driving your vehicle

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

WINTER DRIVING

Woman washing a car tire, no visible text or symbols

More weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimise winter driving problem, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tyres or to install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to select tyres equivalent in size and type of the originally equipped tyres. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tyre chains on the tyre will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

\*NOTICE

Tyre chains are not legal in all countries. Check the country laws before fitting tyre chains.

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tyres of the same size and load range as the original tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tyres on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's originally equipped tyres. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tyre dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

WARNING - Snow tyre size

Snow tyres should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tyres. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

Do not install studded tyres without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Close-up of a car's wheel rim and side panel, showing internal blades and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tyres is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tyre chains on vehicles equipped with aluminium wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

Install tyre chains only on the front tyres.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tyres. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tyre. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class "S" certified.
  • Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.
• If your vehicle has 205/50R17 size tyres with 6.5Jx17 wheel, don't use tyre chain; they can damage your vehicle (wheel, suspension and body).

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

WARNING - Tyre chains

• The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily whilst you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not park a vehicle on a public road without the parking brake applied.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tyre chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Don't place foreign objects or materials in the engine compartment

Placement of foreign object or materials which prevent cooling of the engine, in the engine compartment, may cause a failure or combustion. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.

TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)

If you are considering towing with your vehicle, you should first check with your Local Laws to determine their legal requirements.

Since laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. We recommend that you ask a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Towing a trailer

If you don't use the correct equipment and drive improperly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well - or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously or fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer nose weight are all within the limits.

\*NOTICE - For Europe

• The technically permissible maximum load on the rear axle(s) may be exceeded by not more than 15% and the technically permissible maximum laden mass of the vehicle may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220.4 lbs (100kg), whichever value is lower. In this case, do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h) for vehicle of category M1 or 49.7 mph (80 km/h) for vehicle of category N1.
• When towing a trailer, the additional load imposed at the trailer coupling device may cause the rear tyre maximum load ratings to be exceeded, but not by more than 15% . In such a case, do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h), and the rear tyre pressure should be at least 20 kPa (0.2 bar) above the tyre pressure(s) as recommended for normal use (i.e. without a trailer attached).

CAUTION

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in "Weight of the trailer" that appears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tyres are forced to work harder against the load of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat. The trailer also considerably adds wind resistance, increasing pulling requirements.

OYN059101/OYN059102

Towbars

It's important to have the correct towbar equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you'll need the right towbar. Here are some rules to follow:

- Do you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the towbar.

If you don't seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and water.

- The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for towbars. Do not attach rental towbars or other bumper-type towbars. Use only a frame-mounted towbar that does not attach to the bumper.

• We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for the HYUNDAI trailer towbar accessory.

Safety cables

You should always attach cables between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety cables under the nose of the trailer so that the nose will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the towbar.

Instructions about safety cables may be provided by the towbar manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for attaching safety cables. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety cables to drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weight exceeds the maximum allowed weight without trailer brakes, then the trailer will also require its own brakes as well. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you'll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

- Don't tap into or modify your vehicle's brake system.

WARNING - Trailer brakes Do not use a trailer with its own brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This is not a task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for this work.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you must get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer towbar and platform, safety cables, electrical connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and trailer brakes are still working.

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You'll need more passing distance up ahead when you're towing a trailer. And, because of the increased vehicle length, you'll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move your hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making turns

When you're turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won't strike soft shoulders, kerbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well in advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly connected, the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers you're about to turn, change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when, in fact, they are not. It's important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle's lighting system. Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.

We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer to assist you in installing the wiring harness.

WARNING

Failure to use an approved trailer wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system and/or personal injury.

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don't shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle, you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a trailer will minimise heat build up and extend the life of your transaxle.

CAUTION

• When towing a trailer on steep grades (in excess of 6%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. If the coolant temperature red warning light illuminates, pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide the driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached to your vehicle, you should not park your vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously or fatally injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged if unexpectedly roll down hill.

WARNING - Parking on a hill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with a trailer attached could cause serious injury or death, should the trailer break loose.

However, if you ever have to park your trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space. Turn the steering wheel in the direction of the kerb (left if headed down hill, right if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle, place the car in Neutral. If the vehicle has an automatic transaxle, place the car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the vehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels on the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift to neutral, release the parking brake and slowly release the brakes until the trailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the parking brake and shift the vehicle to R (Reverse) for manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set.

WARNING - Parking brake

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the parking brake is not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill

1. With the manual transaxle in N (Neutral) or automatic transaxle in P (Park), apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down whilst you:
2. Start your engine;
3. Shift into gear; and
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to frequently check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you're trailering, it's a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip. Don't forget to also maintain your trailer and towbar. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day's driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts and bolts should be tight.

CAUTION

• Due to higher load during trailer usage, overheating might occur in hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in a safe area to cool down the engine.
• When towing, check the transaxle fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with an air conditioner, you should install a condenser fan to improve engine performance when towing a trailer.

If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a towbar dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order to allow the engine to properly run-in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer on additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
  • Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 60 mph/100 km/h). If your vehicle is a commercial vehicle, drive less than 50 mph (80 km/h).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower.
  • The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:

Item\Engine		Petrol Engine			Diesel Engine
		1.4 Engine	1.6 Engine
			M/T A/T
Maximum trailer weightIbs. (kg)	Without brake System	1213(550)	1213(550)	1213(550)	1213(550)
	With brake System	2866(1300)	2866(1300)	2425(1100)	2866(1300)
Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling deviceIbs. (kg)		165(75)
Recommended distance from rear wheel centre to coupling pointinch (mm)		30.7(780)

M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer nose

The nose weight of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight includes the kerb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the nose weight to the GVW because your vehicle will also be carrying that weight.

The trailer nose should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer weight, within the limits of the maximum permissible trailer nose weight. After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the nose, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren't, you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

WARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front. The front should be loaded with approximately 60% of the total trailer load; the rear should be loaded with approximately 40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper loading can result in damage to your vehicle and/or personal injury. Check weights and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can cause loss of vehicle control.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification label:

Vehicle kerb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, driver and all standard equipment.

Payload

This is the weight of passengers, luggage and any optional equipment installed.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle kerb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the compliance label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the maximum allowed weight of the vehicle, contents, passengers and optional equipment.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver's (or front passenger's) door sill.

Overloading

WARNING - Vehicle weight

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label attached to the driver's (or front passenger's) door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.

	Road warning / 6-2In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-3If the engine will not start / 6-4Emergency starting / 6-5If the engine overheats / 6-8If you have a flat tyre (with spare tyre) / 6-9If you have a flat tyre (with TyreMobilityKit) / 6-18, 6-24Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) / 6-29, 6-34Towing / 6-39
What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

Press the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the centre console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.
• The hazard waning flasher should always be on whilst the vehicle is being towed.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing

- If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

- If your vehicle has a manual transaxle not equipped with a ignition lock switch, the vehicle can move forward by shifting to the 2nd (Second) or 3 rd (Third) gear and then turning the starter without depressing the clutch pedal.

If you have a flat tyre whilst driving

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down whilst driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed down to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

4. When changing a flat tyre, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If engine stalls whilst driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

WARNING

If the engine refuses to start, no attempt should be made to push or tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transaxle or fuel injection will not be able to be started in this manner since no drive is transmitted through the automatic transaxle whilst the engine is not running, and in the case of fuel injected derivatives, the fuel pump will not operate under tow start conditions. In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust catalyst, damage to the catalyst may result if the vehicle is tow started.

If engine turns over normally but does not start

1. Check the fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode causing serious injury.

WARNING - Battery

- Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks.

If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle.

- Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode.

- Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks.

- The battery may rupture or explode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery.

Jump starting procedure

CAUTION - AGM battery (if equipped)

• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries are maintenance-free and we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. For charging your AGM battery, use only fully automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.
• When replacing the AGM battery, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on top of the battery. This may cause leaks of internal electrolyte that could result in severe injury.

• If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.
  If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off.

• Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.

• If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles come in contact.
• Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
• Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2).
• Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.
  Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle should not be push-started because it might damage the emission control system.

Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do not open the bonnet until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

WARNING

Whilst the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

1. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

1. If the cause of the overheating cannot be found, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the base of the radiator fill opening. Fill the coolant expansion tank to the halfway mark. To ensure the correct water to coolant mix is obtained after top up, testing by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer is required.
2. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we recommend that you call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH SPARE TYRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with three labeled parts (1, 2, 3) and a yellow accent mark on the top part (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.

Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment.

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tyre changing only.

To prevent the jack from "rattling" whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tyres

• Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.
  • Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tyre. The jack should be used on firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine whilst the vehicle is on the jack.
• Do not allow anyone remain in the vehicle whilst it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

Illustration of a woman walking on a highway with a car driving past mountains (no text or symbols)

Removing and storing the spare tyre

Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise.

Store the tyre in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent the spare tyre and tools from "rattling" whilst the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Changing tyres

1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R (Reverse) for manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

Illustration of a silver minivan parked next to a hand架 (no text or symbols on the car or background)

1. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tyre from the vehicle.

2. Block both the front and rear of wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

WARNING - Changing a tyre

• To prevent vehicle movement whilst changing a tyre, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
  • We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tyre has been raised off the ground.

Diagram of a car being lifted by mechanical arms, showing structural components (no text or symbols)

1. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tyre you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel and attached spring-loaded tool with a yellow-green circular arrow (no text or symbols)

OJC060021

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tyre just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1.2 in (30 mm). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

2. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tyre, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

WARNING

- Wheels may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury.

- Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. If there is, remove it.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.

1. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tyre to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

2. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the wheel itself)

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 65\~79 lb·ft (9\~11 kg·m)

If you have a tyre gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tyre in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre from rattling whilst the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

WARNING - Inadequate spare tyre pressure

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to “Tyres and wheels” in section 8.

Important - use of compact spare tyre (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tyre. This compact spare tyre takes up less space than a regular-size tyre. This tyre is smaller than a conventional tyre and is designed for temporary use only.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tyre and rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tyre in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tyre is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at the speed over 80 km/h (50 mph). The original tyre should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or death.

The compact spare should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tyre, observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tyre.
- Ensure that you drive slowly enough to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.
- Any continuous road use of this tyre could result in tyre failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
- Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tyre.
- Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tyre diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tyre and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.
- Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash whilst the compact spare tyre is installed.

• Do not use tyre chains on the compact spare tyre. Because of the smaller size, a tyre chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.
• The compact spare tyre should not be installed on the front axle if the vehicle must be driven in snow or on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre on any other vehicle because this tyre has been designed especially for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tyre's tread life is shorter than a regular tyre. Inspect your compact spare tyre regularly and replace worn compact spare tyres with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tyre should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tyres, snow tyres, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tyre at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer whilst the compact spare tyre is installed.

Jack label 1. Model Name

*The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

1. Maximum allowable load
2. When using the jack, set your parking brake.
3. When using the jack, stop the engine.
4. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack.
5. The designated locations under the frame
6. When supporting the vehicle, the base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.
7. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission.
8. The jack should be used on firm level ground.
9. Jack manufacturer
10. Production date
11. Representative company and address

EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack

EC Declaration of Conformity according to EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC

We, SAMKIND.CO., LTD.

22, Hyojuk3-Gil, Buk-Gu, Ulsan, Korea

declare under our sole responsibility that the product

Product

: Jack Assembly

Type Designation(s) : Jack Assembly-600kg, Jack Assembly-700kg

Jack Assembly-600kg Jack Assembly-1000kg

Jack Assembly-1200kg, Jack Assembly-1500kg

Serial No.

Year of Manufacture : 2013

to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards(s) or other normative

document(s)

EN ISO12100

Safety of machinery - General principles for design - Risk assessment

(2010)

and risk reduction

EN ISO12100-2/A1

Safety of machinery - Basic concepts, general principles for design. Part

(2006)

2: Technical principles

EN 1494/A1

Mobile or movable jacks and associated lifting equipment

(2008)

following the provisions of Directive(s):

2006/42/EC Directive on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to machinery (OJ L157 Jun, 9, 2006)

Hun Duck, Cho President

(Place and date of issue)(name and signature or equivalent making of authorized person)

* T.C.F Compiling Person

Safenet Limited (European Notified body : 1674)

Denford Garage, Denford, Kettering Northants, NY14 4EQ, England

JACKDOC14S

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED) (TYPE A)

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle

The Tyre Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tyre and we recommend that the tyre should be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon as possible.

CAUTION - One sealant for one tyre When two or more tyres are flat, do not use the tyre mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tyre.
WARNING - Tyre wall Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tyre walls. This can result in an accident due to tyre failure.
WARNING - Temporary fix Have your tyre repaired as soon as possible. The tyre may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tyre Mobility Kit.

Illustration of a car tire being installed with a pressure pump and pressure gauge (no text or symbols)

Introduction

With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tyre puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tyre caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tyre.

After you ensured that the tyre is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tyre (distance up to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tyre dealer to have the tyre replaced.

It is possible that some tyres, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tyre may adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tyre Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tyre repair method and is to be used for one tyre only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the Tyre Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
  • To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tyres. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tyre can be sealed using the tyre mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tyres.
• When the tyre and wheel are damaged, do not use Tyre Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may not be effective for tyre damage larger than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm). We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a tyre is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tyre.
  • Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit unattended whilst it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -30^ (-22°F).

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

4. Connectors and cable for the power outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. On/off switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tyre inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tyre inflation pressure

10. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING - Expired sealant

Do not use the Tyre sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tyre failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label (0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a visible spray pipe (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Securely install the sealant filling hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.

1. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

Electric car with attached pressure pump and tire, no visible text or symbols on the main subject

1. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

2. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

3. With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5\~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tyre and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tyre after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tyre and stay away from the tyre when filling it.

CAUTION - Tyre pressure

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tyre pressure is below 200kpa(29 PSI). This could result in an accident due to sudden tyre failure.

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tyre valve.

Return the Tyre Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING - Carbon monoxi

Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area for extended periods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.

Distributing the sealant

1. Immediately drive approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or, about 10min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tyre.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Whilst driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tyre Mobility Kit, the tyre pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, remove the sealant stained with tyre pressure sensors and wheel and inspect in authorized dealer.

Checking the tyre inflation pressure

1. After driving approximately 4\~6 miles (7\~10 km or about 10 min), stop at a safety location.

2. Connect connection hose (9) of the compressor directly to the tyre valve.

3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

4. Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the recommended tyre inflation. With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pressure: Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tyre reading, the compressor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pressure: Loosen the screw cap (8) on the compressor hose.

CAUTION - Tyre pressure sensor

We recommend that you use the sealant of Tyre Mobility Kit from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

The sealant on the tyre pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tyre with a new one and inspect the tyre pressure sensors in authorised dealer.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED) (TYPE B)

Please read the instructions before using the Tyre Mobility Kit.

(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle

Illustration of a car tire connected to a pressure regulator device (no text or symbols visible)

Introduction

With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tyre puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tyre caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tyre.

After you ensured that the tyre is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tyre (up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) in order to reach a vehicle or tyre dealer to have the tyre replaced.

It is possible that some tyres, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tyre may adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tyre Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tyre repair method and is to be used for one tyre only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit".

WARNING

Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if a tyre is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tyre can be sealed using the Tyre Mobility Kit.

Damage to the sidewall must not be repaired due to safety reasons.

Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

4. Connectors and cable for the power outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. On/off switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tyre inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tyre inflation pressure

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING

Before using the Tyre Mobility Kit, follow the instructions on the sealant bottle.

Remove the label with the speed restriction from the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

Please note the expiry date on the sealant bottle.

Using the Tyre Mobility Kit

1. Filling the sealant

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

1) Shake the sealant bottle.

2) Connect the filling hose 2 onto the connector of the sealant bottle (1).
3) Ensure that button 6 on the compressor is not pressed.
4) Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

Close-up of a car wheel being charged with a hose, no visible text or symbols

CAUTION

Securely install the sealant filling hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.

5) Insert the sealant bottle into the housing of the compressor so that the bottle is upright (2).

Illustration of a car wheel connected to a battery pack and plug, no text or symbols present

6) Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.
7) Connect between compressor and the vehicle power outlet using the cable and connectors.

NOTICE

Only use the front passenger side power outlet.
8) With the ignition switched on:

Switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The inflation pressure of the tyre after filling is unimportant.

9) Switch off the compressor.
10) Detach the hose from the sealant bottle connector and from the tyre valve.
Return the Tyre Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation is possible if the engine is left running in a poorly ventilated or unventilated location (such as inside a building).

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approximately 3 km (2 miles) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tyre.

CAUTION

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).

Whilst driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

Producing the tyre inflation pressure

1) After driving approximately 3 km (2 miles), stop at a suitable location.
2) Connect the filling hose 2 of the compressor (clip mounted side) directly and then connect the filling hose 2 (opposite side) to the tyre valve.
3) Connect between compressor and the vehicle power outlet using the cable and connectors.
4) Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to 220 kPa (32 psi). With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pressure: Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

WARNING

Do not let the compressor run for more than 10 minutes, otherwise the device will overheat and may be damaged.

- To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button 8 on the compressor.

CAUTION

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, drive the vehicle a second time, refer to Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4.

Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may be ineffectual for tyre damage larger than approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).

We recommend that you contact the nearest HYUNDAI A/S centre, or a workshop that works according to HYUNDAI repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel if the tyre cannot be made roadworthy with the Tyre Mobility Kit.

WARNING

The tyre inflation pressure must be at least 200 kPa (29 psi). If it is not, do not continue driving. Call for road side service or towing.

Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the Tyre Mobility Kit away from moving traffic. Place your warning triangle in a prominent place to make passing vehicles aware of your location.
• To be sure your vehicle won't move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tyres. Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tyres.
• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws -that have penetrated the tyre.
• Before using the Tyre Mobility Kit, read the precautionary advice printed on the sealant bottle!

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit unattended whilst it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below - 30°C (-22°F).
• Do not use the sealing compound after its expiration date which can be found on the label of the bottle.
• Keep away from children.

*Sealing compound and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized vehicle or tyre dealer. Empty sealing compound bottles may be disposed of at home. Liquid residue from the sealing compound should be disposed of by your vehicle or tyre dealer or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE A) (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a warning symbol (no readable text or symbols beyond the icon)

Low tyre pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tyre, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre pressure telltale when one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tyre pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tyre pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

If the TPMS indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or if it comes on after blinking for approximately one minute, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Low tyre pressure tell-tale

When the tyre pressure monitoring system warning indicator is illuminated, one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible. Inflate the tyres to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tyre inflation pressure label located on the driver's side centre pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tyre cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre.

Then the Low Tyre Pressure telltale may flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tyre repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the low tyre pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tyre pressure was adjusted to the recommended tyre inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tyre pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust the tyres to the recommended tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Significantly low tyre pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tyres can cause the tyres to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the TPMS malfunction indicator.

We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate if snow chains or some separately purchased devices such as notebook computers, mobile charger, remote starter, navigation etc. are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the Low Tyre Pressure will come on. We recommend that the flat tyre be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

We recommend that you use a puncture-repairing agent approved by HYUNDAI.

The sealant on the tyre pressure sensor and wheel shall be eliminated when you replace the tyre with a new one.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre pressure sensor mounted inside the tyre behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you have your tyres serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Even if you replace the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre, the Low Tyre Pressure Telltale will blink or remain on until the low pressure tyre is repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre, the Low Tyre Pressure Telltale may blink or illuminate after a few minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tyre is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or we recommend that the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel be initiated by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tyre pressure telltale will extinguish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If original mounted tyre is replaced with the spare tyre, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and we recommend that the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel be deactivated by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tyre carrier still activates, the tyre pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

You may not be able to identify a low tyre by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tyre pressure gauge to measure the tyre's inflation pressure. Please note that a tyre that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tyre that is cold.

A cold tyre means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tyre to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tyre is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

CAUTION

We recommend that you use the tyre sealant approved by HYUNDAI if your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tyre pressure sensors.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tyre damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING - Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tyre pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - For EUROPE

• Do not modify the vehicle, it may interfere with the TPMS function.
• The wheels on the market do not have a TPMS sensor.
  For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If you use the wheels on the market, use a TPMS sensor approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with a TPMS sensor or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic vehicle inspection conducted in your country.
  *All vehicles sold in the EUROPE market during below period must be equipped with TPMS.
• New model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2012 \~
• Current model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2014\~ (Based on vehicle registrations)

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE B) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) Low tyre pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-tale (Shown on the LCD display)

Each tyre, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tyre inflation pressure for those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre pressure telltale when one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tyre pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tyre pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tyres and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer if any of the below happens:

1. The low tyre pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction indicator do not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running.
2. The TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low tyre pressure position telltale remains illuminated.

Low tyre pressure tell-tale

Low tyre pressure position telltale

When the tyre pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated, one or more of your tyres is significantly under-inflated. The low tyre pressure position telltale light will indicate which tyre is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tyres as soon as possible. Inflate the tyres to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tyre inflation pressure label located on the driver's side centre pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tyre cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tyre with a spare tyre.

Then the TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated and the low tyre pressure position telltale will remain on after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tyre repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the low tyre pressure telltale may illuminate if the tyre pressure was adjusted to the recommended tyre inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tyre pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust the tyres to the recommended tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Significantly low tyre pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tyres can cause the tyres to overheat and fail.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an underinflation warning at the same time as system failure then the TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute and the low tyre pressure position telltale will illuminate e.g. if Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute, but if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tyre is underinflated, the low tyre pressure position telltales may illuminate together with the TPMS malfunction indicator. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the low Tyre Pressure and Position telltales will come on. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

We recommend that you use a puncture-repairing agent approved by HYUNDAI. The sealant on the tyre pressure sensor and wheel shall be eliminated when you replace the tyre with a new one.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre pressure sensor mounted inside the tyre behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you have your tyres serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

After you replace the low pressure tyre with the spare tyre, the TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tyre is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tyre pressure and position tell-tales will extinguish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If original mounted tyre is replaced with the spare tyre, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and we recommend that the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel be deactivated by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tyre carrier still activates, the tyre pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. We recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

You may not be able to identify a low tyre by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tyre pressure gauge to measure the tyre's inflation pressure. Please note that a tyre that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tyre that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that 3 hour period).

Allow the tyre to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tyre is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

A cold tyre means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

CAUTION

We recommend that you use the tyre sealant approved by HYUNDAI if your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tyre pressure sensors.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tyre damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING - Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tyre pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - For EUROPE

• Do not modify the vehicle, it may interfere with the TPMS function.
• The wheels on the market do not have a TPMS sensor.
  For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• If you use the wheels on the market, use a TPMS sensor approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with a TPMS sensor or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic vehicle inspection conducted in your country.
  *All vehicles sold in the EUROPE market during below period must be equipped with TPMS.
• New model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2012 \~
• Current model vehicle : Nov. 1, 2014\~ (Based on vehicle registrations)

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to "Trailer towing" in section 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

Close-up illustration of a car's steering wheel and dashboard, showing two close-up views of the wheel (no text or symbols)

Removable towing hook (front) (if equipped)

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speed. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.
  • Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

• Before emergency towing, check if the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily and with even force.
  • To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving manoeuvres which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable to move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.

Top-down diagram showing three vehicles: a pickup truck, a car with a hose, and a car with a trunk, connected by lines (no text or symbols)

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn't locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

CAUTION - Automatic transaxle

• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.
  • To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing.
• Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing, if equipped)

WARNING

Do not use the tie-down hooks under the front (or rear) of the vehicle for towing purposes. These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks are used for towing, the tie-down hooks or front (or rear) bumper will be damaged and this could lead to serious injury.

	Engine compartment / 7-2Maintenance services / 7-3Owner maintenance / 7-5Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-8Engine oil / 7-11Engine coolant / 7-13Brake/clutch fluid / 7-16Washer fluid / 7-18Parking brake / 7-18Fuel filter / 7-19Air cleaner / 7-20Climate control air filter / 7-21Wiper blades / 7-23Battery / 7-26Tyres and wheels / 7-30Fuses / 7-41
Maintenance
	Light bulbs / 7-52Appearance care / 7-62Emission control system / 7-70

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
11. Fuel filter*
    * if equipped

OJC025003R/OJC025004R

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner's responsibility

\*NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsibility.

We recommend in general that you have your vehicle serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties. Detailed warranty information is provided in your Service Passport. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered when your vehicle is covered by warranty.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

\*NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Maintenance work

• Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously injured whilst performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Working under the bonnet with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewellery or loose clothing. These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the engine whilst working under the bonnet, make certain that you remove all jewellery (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

CAUTION

• Do not put heavy objects or apply excessive force on top of the engine cover (if equipped) or fuel related parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system (fuel lines and fuel injection devices), we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not drive long time with the engine cover (if equipped) removed.
• When checking the engine room, do not go near fire. Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flammable oils that may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, ignition cables and electrical wiring, you should disconnect the battery "-" terminal. You may get an electric shock from the electric current.
• When you remove the interior trim cover with a flat bed (-) driver, be careful not to damage the cover.
• Be careful when you replace and clean bulbs to avoid burns or electrical shock.

WARNING - Diesel Engine

Never work on injection system with the engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off the engine. High-pressure pump, rail, injectors and high-pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body. People using pacemakers should not move than 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room whilst engine is running, since the high currents in the electronic engine control system produce considerable magnetic fields.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle. If you have any question, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labour, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant reservoir.
• Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause burns or other serious injury.

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when travelling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all tyres including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windscreen washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.
• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and bonnet hinges.
• Lubricate the door and bonnet locks and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.
- Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.
- Extensive use of brakes.
- Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used.
- Driving on rough or muddy roads.
- Driving in mountainous areas.
- Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
- Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
- More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32°C (90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. We recommend that the fuel filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Diesel only

Never work on the injection system with the engine running or within 30 seconds after shutting off the engine. High pressure pump, rail, injectors and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine stops. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body. People using pacemakers should not move more than 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room whilst the engine is running, since the high currents in the Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that you use air cleaner filter for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Spark plugs (for petrol engine)

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect spark plugs when the engine is hot. You may burn yourself.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. We recommend that the automatic transaxle fluid changed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer according to the maintenance schedule.

\*NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid colour is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker. It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed colour.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" (Minimum) and "MAX" (Maximum) marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, refer to the Hyundai web site.

(http://service.hyundai-motor.com)

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant (if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

ENGINE OIL

Close-up of an engine bay with visible components and a magnified inset showing a tool labeled 'F4' and 'L' (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Checking the engine oil level (Petrol engine)

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and reinsert it fully.

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

1. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).

Close-up of a mechanical component with pipes and a funnel pouring liquid (no visible text or symbols)

If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil to bring the level to F (Full). Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

CAUTION

Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine.

Maintenance

1. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low).

Checking the engine oil level (Diesel engine)

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and reinsert it fully.

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

Engine bay with a cup pouring liquid into the engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil to bring the level to F (Full). Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

We recommend that the engine oil and filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause skin irritation or cancer if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before travelling to a colder climate.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

• When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine coolant. It may cause water pump failure and engine seizure, etc.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Removing radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap whilst the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage. Also hot coolant or steam could cause serious personal injury.
• Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back whilst the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug whilst the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

WARNING

The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed.

It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled parts (F, L) and no readable text or symbols beyond labels

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F (Full) and L (Low) marked on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to F (Full), but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Recommended engine coolant

• Use only soft (distilled) water in the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminium engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
  • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient Temperature	Mixture Percentage (volume)
	Antifreeze	Water
-15°C (5°F) 35	65
-25°C (-13°F) 40	60
-35°C (-31°F) 50	50
-45°C (-49°F) 60	40

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windscreen and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX (Maximum) and MIN (Minimum) marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX (Maximum) level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings and/or clutch disc (if equipped).

If the fluid level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants or capacities" in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Loss of brake fluid

In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

\*NOTICE

Before removing the brake/clutch filler cap, read the warning on the cap.

WARNING

Clean filler cap before removing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch fluid from a sealed container.

WARNING - Brake/clutch fluid

When changing and adding brake/clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be properly disposed. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch system can damage brake/clutch system parts.

WASHER FLUID

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve or connector with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windscreen and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to the paint and body trim.
• Windscreen washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame come in contact with the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.
• Windscreen washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid coming in contact with the windscreen washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

PARKING BRAKE

Cross-sectional view of a mechanical assembly with internal components and a yellow accent tag (no text or symbols)

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard whilst fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recommend that the system be adjusted by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Stroke : 6\~8 "clicks" at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)

Draining water from the fuel filter

The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an important role of separating water from fuel and accumulating the water in its bottom.

If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the warning light comes on when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If this warning light illuminates, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If the water accumulated in the fuel filter is not drained at proper times, damages to the major parts such as the fuel system can be caused by water permeation in the fuel filter.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)

Extracting air from the fuel filter

If you drove until you have no fuel left or if you replaced the fuel filter, be sure to extract air in the fuel system as it makes you difficult to start the engine.

1. Press the priming pump (1) several times.
2. Open the air extracting hall after removing the bolt (2) using a screw-driver to extract air.

\*NOTICE

Repeat the procedure above until all the air is out.

\*NOTICE

• Use cloths when you extract air so that the fuel is not sprayed around.
• Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or the injection pump before starting the engine to prevent fire.
• Finally, check each part if the fuel is leaking.

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

NOTICE

When replacing the fuel filter cartridge, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

AIR CLEANER

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section showing a yellow arrow and dotted circle (no text or symbols)

Filter replacement

You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element. Clean the filter by using compressed air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

Close-up of a hand opening a car air vent with filter array (no visible text or symbols)

1. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
2. Replace the air cleaner filter.
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips.

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to "Maintenance under severe usage conditions" in this section.)

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
  • We recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. Use of nongenuine parts could damage the air flow sensor, turbocharger or engine.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in the severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you, the owner, replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

Replace the filter according to the maintenance Schedule.

Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and exhaust vent (no text or symbols visible)

Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box.

1. Loosen the screws (1) and then remove the glove box inner panel (2).

Maintenance

Interior view of a vehicle air conditioner unit showing airflow path and component placement (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the climate control air filter cover whilst pressing the lock on the right side of the cover.

Exterior view of a rectangular metal grate with evenly spaced slats (no text or symbols)

OYF079046OJC070014

1. Replace the climate control air filter.
2. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

\*NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol(↓) facing downwards.

Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

WIPER BLADES

Diagram of a car showing two windows with white smoke or vapor rising, no text or symbols present

Blade inspection

\*NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windscreen difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windscreen or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windscreen wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use petrol, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

Maintenance

Close-up of a curved mechanical component with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Front windscreen wiper blade 1. Raise the wiper arm.

1. Press the button and slide the blade assembly upward.

Mechanical clamp or tool assembly with a magnified inset showing a detail of the component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
2. Return the wiper arm on the wind-screen.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windscreen, since it may chip or crack the windscreen.

Close-up of a car window handle with yellow arrows indicating movement, showing the blade and handle (no text or symbols)

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and an inset showing a hand holding a tool (no visible text or symbols)

1. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the centre part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
2. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
3. Place back the wiper arm to the proper position.

BATTERY

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

\*NOTICE

Basically equipped battery is maintenance free type. If your vehicle is equipped with the battery marked with LOWER and UPPER on the side, you can check the electrolyte level. The electrolyte level should be between LOWER and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is low, it needs to add distilled (demineralized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or other electrolyte). When refill, be careful not to splash the battery and adjacent components. And do not overfill the battery cells. It can cause corrosion on other parts. After then ensure that tighten the cell caps. We recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. We recommend that the battery be returned to a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.
  Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily injury or death.

CAUTION

If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

Example

OJD072039

* The actual battery label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Battery capacity label

1. CMF60L-BCI : HYUNDAI model name of battery
2. 12V : Nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : Nominal capacity (in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : Nominal reserve capacity (in min.)
5. 550CCA : Cold-test current in amperes by SAE
6. 440A : Cold-test current in amperes by EN

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on whilst the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load whilst the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

⚠️ CAUTION - AGM battery (if equipped)

• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries are maintenance-free and we recommend that the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. For charging your AGM battery, use only fully automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.
• When replacing the AGM battery, we recommend that you use parts for replacement from a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on top of the battery. This may cause leaks of internal electrolyte that could result in severe injury.
• If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately. If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off.

WARNING - Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

• Turn off the battery charger main switch.

• Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
• Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
- Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system (See section 4)
- Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)

TYRES AND WHEELS

Tyre care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tyre inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures

All tyre pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tyres are cold. "Cold Tyres" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tyre wear.

For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tyre and wheels" in section 8.

Close-up of a car door panel with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the vehicle.

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tyre pressures at the proper levels. If a tyre frequently needs refilling, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
  • Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the centre of the tyre tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

• Warm tyres normally exceed recommended cold tyre pressures by 4 to 6 psi (0.28 to 0.41 bar). Do not release air from warm tyres to adjust the pressure or the tyres will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tyre inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

WARNING - Tyre Inflation Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tyre life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tyre failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

⚠️ CAUTION - Tyre pressure Always observe the following:

• Check tyre pressure when the tyres are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare tyre each time you check the pressure of other tyres.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tyres can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tyres have been damaged, replace them.

Checking tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres once a month or more.

Also, check the tyre pressure of the spare tyre.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check tyre pressure. You can not tell if your tyres are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tyres may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tyre's inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tyre valve stem. Press the tyre gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tyre inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tyre and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

WARNING

• Inspect your tyres frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tyre pressure gauge.
• Tyres with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tyre failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tyre pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tyre label located on the driver's side centre pillar.
• Worn tyres can cause accidents. Replace tyres that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tyre. HYUNDAI recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tyres on your vehicle.

Tyre rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tyres be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tyre if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tyre pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to "Tyre and wheels" in section 8.

With a full-size spare tyre

graph TD
    A["Input Module"] --> B["Output Module"]
    C["Input Module"] --> D["Processing Unit"]
    E["Input Module"] --> D
    F["Input Module"] --> D
    G["Input Module"] --> D
    H["Input Module"] --> D
    I["Input Module"] --> D
    J["Input Module"] --> D
    K["Input Module"] --> D
    L["Input Module"] --> D
    M["Input Module"] --> D
    N["Input Module"] --> D
    O["Input Module"] --> D
    P["Input Module"] --> D
    Q["Input Module"] --> D
    R["Input Module"] --> D
    S["Input Module"] --> D
    T["Input Module"] --> D
    U["Input Module"] --> D
    V["Input Module"] --> D
    W["Input Module"] --> D
    X["Input Module"] --> D
    Y["Input Module"] --> D
    Z["Input Module"] --> D
    AA["Input Module"] --> D
    AB["Input Module"] --> D
    AC["Input Module"] --> D
    AD["Input Module"] --> D
    AE["Input Module"] --> D
    AF["Input Module"] --> D
    AG["Input Module"] --> D
    AH["Input Module"] --> D
    AI["Input Module"] --> D
    AJ["Input Module"] --> D
    AK["Input Module"] --> D
    AL["Input Module"] --> D
    AM["Input Module"] --> D
    AN["Input Module"] --> D
    AO["Input Module"] --> D
    AP["Input Module"] --> D
    AQ["Input Module"] --> D
    AR["Input Module"] --> D
    AS["Input Module"] --> D
    AT["Input Module"] --> D
    AU["Input Module"] --> D
    AV["Input Module"] --> D
    AW["Input Module"] --> D
    AX["Input Module"] --> D
    AY["Input Module"] --> B
    AZ["Input Module"] --> C
    BA["Input Module"] --> D
    BB["Input Module"] --> E
    BC["Input Module"] --> F
    BD["Input Module"] --> G
    BE["Input Module"] --> H
    BF["Input Module"] --> AG
    BG["Input Module"] --> AH

CBGQ0706

Without a spare tyre or with a compact spare tyre

CBGQ0707

Directional tyres (if equipped)

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

\*NOTICE

Rotate radial tyres that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare tyre for tyre rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tyres under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

Wheel alignment and tyre balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tyre life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tyre wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminium wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tyre. Replace the tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tyre.

CAUTION

When replacing the tyres, recheck and tighten the wheel nuts after driving about 620 miles (1,000 km). If the steering wheel shakes or the vehicle vibrates whilst driving, the tyre is out of balance. Align the tyre balance. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Replacing tyres

To reduce the chance or serious or fatal injuries from an accident caused by tyre failure or loss of vehicle control:

• When replacing tyres (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tyres (or wheels) as a pair. Replacing just one tyre can seriously affect your vehicle's handling.
• Replace tyres that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tyres can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with too little or too much pressure in your tyres. This can lead to uneven wear and tyre failure.
• When replacing tyres, never mix radial and bias-ply tyres on the same car. You must replace all tyres (including the spare) if moving from radial to bias-ply tyres.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Using tyres and wheel other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle control, resulting in a serious accident.
• Wheels that do not meet HYUNDAI's specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tyre size can affect wheel speed. When replacing tyres, all 4 tyres must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tyres of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESC (Electronic Stability Control) to work irregularly. (if equipped)

Compact spare tyre replacement (if equipped)

A compact spare tyre has a shorter tread life than a regular size tyre. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tyre. The replaced compact spare tyre should be the same size and design tyre as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tyre wheel. The compact spare tyre is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tyre wheel is not designed to mount a regular size tyre.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tyre clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tyres, tyres that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tyres should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road, to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tyres installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tyre sidewall labeling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tyre and also provides the tyre identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tyre in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tyre size designation

A tyre's sidewall is marked with a tyre size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tyres for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tyre size designation mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tyre size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

P205/55R16 91H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres marked with the prefix "P" are intended for use on passenger cars or light trucks; however, not all tyres have this marking).

205 - Tyre width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tyre's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tyre can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tyres. The speed rating is part of the tyre size designation on the sidewall of the tyre. This symbol corresponds to that tyre's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating Symbol	Maximum Speed
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
W*	168 mph (270 km/h)

* W speed rating is sub-category of the Z speed rating.

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : Tyre Identification Number)

Any tyres that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tyre) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tyre consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tyre size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents that the tyre was produced in the 16th week of 2017.

WARNING - Tyre age

Tyres degrade over time, even when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tyres generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning could cause sudden tyre failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or death.

4. Tyre ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tyre, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tyre and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tyre. When replacing the tyres on the vehicle, always use a tyre that has the same load rating as the factory installed tyre.

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tyre sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tyre when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tyre graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tyre graded 100.

The relative performance of tyres depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tyres. The tyres available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tyre's ability to stop on wet pavement measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tyre is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tyre's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tyre to degenerate and reduce tyre life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING - Tyre

temperature

The temperature grade for this tyre is established for a tyre that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and sudden tyre failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

Low aspect ratio tyre (if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tyres, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tyres are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tyres.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tyre is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tyre of the low aspect ratio tyre is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below.

• When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tyres and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tyres and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or kerb stone, drive slowly so that the tyres and wheels are not damaged.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the tyre is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the tyre condition or contact a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• To prevent damage to the tyre, inspect the tyre condition and pressure every 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the tyre damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tyre damage, even though you cannot see the tyre damage with your own eyes, have the tyre checked or replaced because the tyre damage may cause air leakage from the tyre.
• If the tyre is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or kerb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.
• You can find out the tyre information on the tyre sidewall.

FUSES

■ Blade type

Normal

Blown

■ Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

Diagram of a microchip or connector with an inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

Normal

Diagram of a computer monitor displaying an image, with no visible text or symbols on the screen or device itself.

Blown

Normal

Blown
OJC070046D

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel.

Before replacing a blown fuse, disconnect the negative battery cable.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminium foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

\*NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Instrument panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.

Interior view of a black plastic electronic device casing with internal components and a yellow arrow indicating a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

OYN079023OYN079018

1. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel cover.
2. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.
3. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
   If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse.
   If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing a battery pack with yellow arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory fuse to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver's side panel cover and pull up the memory fuse.

\*NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be reset after replacement. Refer to "Battery" in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tab and pulling up the cover.

Maintenance

1. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
2. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. If not, electrical failures may occur from water leaking in.

3D mechanical component diagram showing internal structure with no visible text or symbols

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

\*NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Inner fuse panel

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted hard drive component (no visible text or symbols)

Engine compartment fuse panel

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted folder icon and a yellow arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols visible)

Diesel only

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted internal cavity (no text or symbols visible)

OYN079024R/OYN079025/OYN079026

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle, the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Inner fuse panel

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component
	25A POWER WINDOW Left Power Window
	25A POWER WINDOW Right Power Window
	10A OUTSIDE MIRROR HEATED Outside Mirror Defroster
	10A BLOWER Air Conditioning System, ECU
	20A DOOR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock
	20A SUNROOF Sunroof
	15A	SAFETY POWER WINDOW	Safety Power Window (Driver)
	10A	FOLDING MIRROR	Outside Mirror Folding Switch, Centre Facia Switch
	10A TAIL LAMP Left Tail Light
	10A TAIL LAMP Right Tail Light
	10A	START	Start Motor Relay
	10A	DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT	BCM
	15A	HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL	Centre Facia Switch
	25A	POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE	Smk Unit
	10A	POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE	Smk Unit
	10A	HEADLAMP HI INDICATOR	Cluster
Description Fuse rating System	Protected Component
	10A	MOTOR DRIVEN POWER STEERING	MDPS
	15A	TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT	Speed In Sensor, Speed Out Sensor, Speed Sensor, Inhibitor Switch
IGN COIL	15A IGNITION COIL Ignition Coil, Condensor
IG2	10A IGNITION		HLLD Switch, HLLD Actuator, BCM, Air Conditioning System, Sunroof, ETCS
[T2DS]	25A	WINDSCREEN WIPING SYSTEM (CONTINUOUS)	Front Wiper Motor Relay, Multi Function Switch Wiper
	10A FRONT FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamp, BCM
RRQ#	10A REAR FOG LAMP Rear Fog Lamp, BCM
,	10A ROOM LAMP Room Lamp Switch, MUT
STOP LAMP	15A STOP LAMP Stop Lamp, Stop Relay
CLUSTER	10A	CLUSTER	Cluster, BCM, Digital Clock
IG1	10A	IGNITION	Audio (ISG), TPMS, Centre Facia Switch
	10A	ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM	Yaw Rate Sensor, ABS(ESC), ESC Switch
B/UP LAMP	10A	B/UP LAMP	Back Up Lamp
	10A	ELECTRONIC (ENGINE) CONTROL UNIT	ECU, AFS, SMK Unit

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component
RAIN SENSOR<PTC>	10A	RAIN SENSOR(PTC HEATER)	Rain Sensor Relay (PTC, Fuel Filter Heater)
	15A	FRONT HEAT RAYS JOIN GLASS	Front Deicer, BCM
OI IT	15A POWER OUTLET Front Power Outlet
O R	25A POWER OUTLET Rear Power Outlet		Centre Power Outlet, Navigation
ACC	10A ACCESSORY Audio, BCM, DC Converter, Digital Clock
	10A AIR BAG INDICATOR Cluster (Air Bag Indicator)
	10A AIR BAG ACU
	10A	DIRECTION INDICATOR TURN SIGNAL LAMP	Side Repeater Lamp (LH/RH), Rear Combination Lamp (LH/RH)
STATIC LP	10A STATIC BENDING LAMP Static Bending Lamp
	15A	WIPER SYSTEM RR	Rear Wiper Motor, Rain Sensor, Multi Function Switch Wiper
	15A	SEAT HEATER	Centre Facia Switch
AUDIO	20A	AUDIO Audio
BCM	10A LUGGAGE LAMP Luggage Lamp, BCM

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component
IG2	50A IGNITION Start Sol, IGN_SW
B.	50A BATTERY		I/P Junction(Stop Lamp 15A,Tail Lamp Relay, Room Lamp, Luggage 10A,Tail Lamp LH 10A, Tail Lamp RH 10A)
E[4ZYK]	30A FUEL FILTER HEATER Fuel Filter Heater (Diesel)
ALT	125A/150A ALTERNATOR Alternator (Petrol/Diesel)
1[SW62]	40A ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS, ESC
2	40A ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS, ESC
RR HTD	40A	REAR HEAT RAYS JOIN GLASS	I/P Junction(Rear Heater Relay, Heated Mirror 10A)
	40A BLOWER Blower Motor
	80A	MOTOR DRIVEN POWER STEERING	MDPS(Motor Driven Power Steering)
IG1	30A IGNITION Ignition Switch (IG1, Accessory)
[4KO2]	40A	COOLING FAN	Cooling Fan Relay(High), Cooling Fan Relay(Low)
2	30A	ELECTRONIC (ENGINE) CONTROL UNIT	"Main Relay, ECU 4 10A, ECU 1 20A, ECU 3 10A, Sensor 1 10A, Sensor 2 10A,Injector 15A"
B.	50A BATTERY		"I/P Junction(Hazard 15A, Power Window Relay, Power window LH 25A, Power window RH 25A ,Safety Power window 15A, Sunroof 20A, PDM 2 10A, Deicer 15A, Folding 10A, PDM1 25A, Door Lock 20A)"

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component
	20A HEADLAMP HIGH BEAMS Headlamp		High Beam
[TZY8]	10A HORN Horn, Burglar Alarm Horn, Battery Sensor
	20A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Headlamp Low Beam
F [Y6SW] IP	20A FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Relay (Petrol)
[DG3C]I/A R	10A	ELECTRONIC (ENGINE)CONTROL UNIT/AIR HTR	ECU (Petrol), Air Heater (Diesel)
INJECTOR	15A INJECTOR		INJECTOR, FUEL PUMP RELAY (PETROL)E-EGR, WGT, E-EGR, CPS, FUEL HEATER RELAY (DIESEL)
	10A	SENSOR 1	AIR CONDITIONING RELAY, STOP SW, COOLING FAN RELAY (HIGH),COOLING FAN RELAY (LOW)
B/UP LAMP2	10A	B/UP LAMP	Rear Combination Lamp
[83SW]	10A	AIR CONDITIONER	Air Conditioning Relay
	10A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Cluster(Low Indicator), Head Lamp Low LH
	20A	ELECTRONIC(ENGINE)CONTROL UNIT	ECU
	10A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Head Lamp Low RH
	10A	ELECTRONIC(ENGINE)CONTROL UNIT	ECU, TCU, GLOW Relay
	10A	RAIN SENSOR	Rain Sensor

Engine compartment fuse panel (Diesel engine only)

Description Fuse rating System	Protected Component
PTC HTR 1 50A	PTC Heater 1	PTC Heater 1
PTC HTR 2 50A	PTC Heater 2	PTC Heater 2
PTC HTR 3 50A	PTC Heater 3	PTC Heater 3
GLOW 80A	GLOW Plug GLOW	Plug

LIGHT BULBS

WARNING - Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

Use only the bulbs of the specified wattage.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don't have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, we recommend that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlight assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

\*NOTICE

After driving in heavy rain or washing the vehicle, headlight and taillight lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn't indicate a problem with your vehicle. If water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Headlight, position light, turn signal light, front fog light bulb replacement

Type A

(1) Headlight (Low)
(2) Headlight (High)
(3) Smart cornering light*
(4) Position light
(5) Front turn signal light
(6) Front fog light*

* if equipped

Type B

(1) Headlight (Low/High)
(2) Position light
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Static bending light
(5) Front fog light*

* if equipped

Headlight bulb

WARNING - Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

Maintenance

\*Traffic Change (For Europe)

The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand several technical solutions (ex. automatic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). This headlamps are designed not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you need not change your headlamps in a country with opposite traffic direction.

■ Type B

1. Open the bonnet.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining wire by depressing the end and pushing it upward.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.

\*NOTICE

We recommend that the headlight aiming be adjusted after an accident or after the headlight assembly is reinstalled at a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible components and a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Position light

1. Remove the cover by turning it counterclockwise (if equipped).
2. Remove the socket from the assembly by pulling it out.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
5. Install the socket into the assembly by pushing it in.

Interior view of a car's engine bay with visible components and a yellow directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Turn signal light

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

Maintenance

1. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
3. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)

1. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.
2. Disconnect the power connector from the socket.
3. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.
4. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.
5. Connect the power connector to the socket.

Close-up of a car side mirror with a yellow arrow pointing to the lens (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Side repeater light bulb replacement

Type A

If the light bulb does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Type B

1. Remove the light assembly from the vehicle by pushing the lens forward and pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper and side panel, showing numbered components (no text or symbols on the body)

Rear combination light bulb replacement

Type A

(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
(5) Rear fog light

Type B

(1) Tail light
(2) Stop light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Back-up light
(5) Rear fog light

Mechanical assembly diagram showing two views of a component with yellow arrows indicating features, no readable text or symbols present.

Outside

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the outside light assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light assembly from the body of the vehicle.

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket.

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and pushing or rotating it until it locks into place.

4. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

5. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.
6. Tighten the screws.

Tail light (Type B)

If the light does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Interior view of a car trunk with visible structural components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Inside

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the tailgate trim by removing the plastic mounting clips.

CAUTION

Be careful when removing the plastic mounting clips in cold weather, it may crack.

Close-up of a mechanical component with visible wiring and housing (no text or symbols)

■ Type B

Interior view of a vehicle's door frame showing internal components and no visible text or symbols

OJC075042

1. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket.

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and pushing or rotating it until it locks into place.

4. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

5. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.
6. Tighten the screws.

Maintenance

Rear fog light

1. Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
5. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a highlighted section (no text or symbols visible)

High mounted stop light replacement (if equipped)

If the light does not operate, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with internal parts and a magnified inset showing a tool or assembly (no text or symbols visible)

License plate light bulb replacement

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the tailgate trim by removing the plastic mounting clips.

CAUTION

Be careful when removing the plastic mounting clips in cold weather, it may crack.

1. Remove the lens by pushing the cover.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens securely.

■ Front map lamp

Interior view of a car showing two compartments with arrows indicating flow or movement, no visible text or symbols

■ Side room lamp/Vanity mirror lamp

Close-up of a medical device with a digital display and a magnified view of a vertical tube or tube (no text or symbols visible)

■ Centre room lamp

Close-up of a door panel with a control knob and highlighted yellow arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

OYN079046/OYN079047/OJC070043

Glove box lamp

■ Luggage room lamp

OYN079052/H/OYN079049

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the "OFF" button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

1. Install a new bulb in the socket.
2. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
  Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle. Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes whilst driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly whilst maintaining a slow forward speed.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminium parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

\*NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on the underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes whilst driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly whilst maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminium wheel maintenance

The Aluminium wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on Aluminium wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the Aluminium wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle's surface by moisture that slowly evaporates.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

- If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the colour of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its colour can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

• Feature of Seat Leather

• Leather is made from the outer skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a natural object, each part differs in thickness or density.
  Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.
• The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.
• The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.
• Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.

CAUTION

• Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

• Caring for the leather seats

• Vacuum the seat periodically to remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.
• Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.
• Use of proper leather protective may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the colour. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.
• Light coloured (beige, cream beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable. Clean the seats frequently.
• Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

- Cleaning the leather seats

• Remove all contaminations instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.
• Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.)
  Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminate spot. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.
• Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)
  Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.
• Oil
  Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natural leather.
• Chewing gum
  Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service Passport in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.
  • After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

• Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

1. Evaporative emission control system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapours from escaping into the atmosphere.

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions whilst maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
  In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colourless and odourless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING - Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot whilst the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned. Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. We recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot emitted from the vehicle.

Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF system automatically burns (oxidizes) and removes the accumulated soot according to the driving condition. In other words, the active burning by engine control system and high exhaust gas temperature caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the accumulated soot.

However, if the vehicle continues to be driven at low speed for a long time, the accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperature. In this particular case, the amount of soot is out of detection limit, the soot oxidation process by engine control system may not happen and the malfunction indicator light may blink.

When the malfunction indicator light blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the vehicle at more than 37 mph (60km/h) or at more than second gear with 1500 \~ 2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light continues to blink in spite of the procedure, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a long time, the DPF system can be damaged and fuel consumption can worsen.

⚠️ CAUTION - Diesel Fuel (if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for diesel vehicle equipped with the DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.

	Engine / 8-2Dimensions / 8-2Bulb wattage / 8-3Tyres and wheels / 8-4Load and speed capacity tyres / 8-5Weight and volume / 8-5Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-6Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-9Vehicle certification label / 8-9Tyre specification and pressure label / 8-10Engine number / 8-10Air conditioner compressor label / 8-10Refrigerant label / 8-11Declaration of conformity / 8-11
Specifications & Consumer information

ENGINE

Item Petrol 1.4 Petrol 1.6		Diesel 1.4 Diesel 1.6
Displacement cu. in (cc)		85.19 (1396) 97.09 (1591) 85.12 (1396)		96.53 (1582)
Bore x Stroke in. (mm)		3.03x2.95(77x74.99)	3.03x3.36(77x85.44)	2.95x3.11(75x79)	3.03x3.32(77.2x84.5)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2					1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line					4, In-line

DIMENSIONS

Item in. (mm)
Overall length 162.20 (4120)
Overall width 69.49 (1765)
Overall height		62.99 (1600)
Front tread	195/65R15	61.14 (1553)
	205/55R16	60.91 (1547)
	205/50R17	60.67 (1541)
Rear tread	195/65R15	61.30 (1557)
	205/55R16	61.06 (1551)
	205/50R17	60.83 (1545)
Wheelbase		102.95 (2615)

BULB WATTAGE

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front	Headlights	Type A	High 55 H7
			Low 55 H7
		Type B	High 60 9005HL+
			Low 60 9005HL+
	Smart cornering lights* 55 H7
	Static bending light* 55 H11
	Front turn signal lights	Type A 21 P21W
		Type B 21		PY21W L/L
	Position lights	Type A		5 W5W
		Type B 16		W16W L/L
	Side repeater lights*			5 W5W
	Front fog lights*			27 H27W
Rear	Stop and tail lights			21/5	P21/5W
	Stop lights			21	P21W L/L
	Tail light	Type A		21/5	P21/5W
		Type B		LED	LED
	Rear turn signal lights	Type A 21 P21W
		Type B 21		PY21W L/L
	Back-up lights			16	W16W
	Rear fog lights			21 P21W
	High mounted stop light			LED	LED
	License plate lights			5 W5W
Interior	Front map lamp			10	FESTOON
	Side room lamp*			5 W5W
	Centre room lamp*			8	FESTOON
	Vanity mirror lamp*			5	W5W
	Luggage room lamp			5	W5W
	Glove box lamp			5	W5W

* : If equipped

TYRES AND WHEELS

Item Tyre size	Wheel size		Cold tyre inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)				Wheel lug nut torque kgf·m (lbf·ft, N·m)
			Normal load *1		Maximum load
			Front Rear	Front Rear
Full size tyre	195/65R15	6.0J×15	2.2(32, 220)	2.2(32, 220)	2.2(32, 220)	2.2(32, 220)	9~11(65~79, 88~107)
	205/55R16	6.0J×16	2.5*2(36, 250)*2	2.5*2(36, 250)*2	2.5*2(36, 250)*2	2.5*2(36, 250)*2
	205/50R17	6.5J×17
Compact spare tyre (if equipped)	T125/80D15	4.0T×15	4.2(60, 420)	4.2(60, 420)	4.2(60, 420)	4.2(60, 420)

* This information is for vehicles equipped with 16 inch tyre of 1.4 Petrol engine / 1.4 Diesel engine.
^1 : Normal load : Up to 2 persons
^2 : Applies to MSTA Tyre Pressure

\*NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tyre pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
  Tyres typically loose 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 7^ temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tyre pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tyre pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level. (Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km)

CAUTION

When replacing tyres, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tyres of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TYRES

Item Tyre size Wheel size			Load Capacity Speed		Capacity
			LI *1	kg	SS *2	km/h
Full size tyre	195/65R15	6.0J×15	91	615 T 190
	195/65R15	6.0J×15	91	615	H	210
	205/55R16	6.0J×16	91	615	H	210
	205/50R17	6.5J×17	89	580	V	240
Compact spare tyre (if equipped)	T125/80D15	4.0T×15	95	690	M	130

* LI : LOAD INDEX
*2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL

WEIGHT AND VOLUME

Item Petrol 1.4 Petrol		1.6 Diesel 1.4 Diesel	1.6
Gross vehicle weightIbs. (kg)	M/T 37	69.9 (1710) 3769.9 (	1710) 3968.3 (1800)		3990.3 (1810)
	A/T - 3	813.9 (1730) --
Luggage volumecu ft (l)		15.5 (440) 15.5	(440) 15.5 (440)		15.5 (440)

M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)	Petrol Engine		3.6 / (3.16 Imp. qts.)	API Service SL or SM, ACEA A5 or aboveUse the engine oils approved by Hyundai Motor Company.Consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for details.
RecommendsShellHELIXMotor oils
	Diesel Engine		5.3 / (4.66 Imp. qts.)	ACEA C3 or C2 (With DPF *3),ACEA B4 (Without DPF *3)
Manual transaxle fluid	PetrolEngine	1.4 L	1.9 / (1.67 Imp. qts.)	API GL-4 SAE 75W-85 (fill for-life)
		1.6 L	1.8 / (1.58 Imp. qts.)
	Diesel Engine		1.9 / (1.67 Imp. qts.)
Automatic transaxle fluid			7.3 / (7.71 Imp. qts.)	MICHANG ATF SP-IV,SK ATF SP-IV,NOCA ATF SP-IV,HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV

Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant	Petrol Engine	5.8 ~ 5.9 / (5.10 ~ 5.19 Imp. qts.)	Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminium radiator
	Diesel Engine	6.3 / (5.54 Imp. qts.)
Brake/Clutch fluid		0.7 ~ 0.8 / (0.62 ~ 0.70 Imp. qts.)	FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel		50 / (10.9 Imp. gal.)	Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1

^1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
^2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
^*3 : Diesel Particulate Filter

Recommended Engine Oil

Supplier	Product
	Petrol Engine Diesel Engine
Shell	HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30 HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
	HELIX ULTRA 5W-40 HELIX ULTRA AP-L 5W-30

Recommended SAE viscosity number

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature (°C)	-30	-20	-10	0	10	20	30	40	50
	-10	0	20	40	60	80	100	120
Petrol Engine Oil *1(For Europe)
Diesel Engine Oil

*1: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40 (API Service SL, SM / ACEA A5 or above).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

Close-up of a car interior component with a labeled section (1) and reference number OYN089001, no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the driver seat. To check the number, remove the cover (1).

VIN label

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windscreen from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's (or front passenger's) side centre pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

TYRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

Close-up of a car's side panel showing cable routing and a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

The tyres supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tyre label located on the driver's side centre pillar gives the tyre pressures recommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL

A compressor label informs you the type of compressor your vehicle is equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).

REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

The refrigerant label provides information such as refrigerant type and amount. (R-134a or R-1234yf)

The label is located on the underside of the bonnet.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

The radio frequency components of the vehicle comply with requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1995/5/EC.

Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on HYUNDAI web site as follows;

http://service.hyundai-motor.com

Index

I

Index

A

Air bags 3-39

Air bag warning label....3-61

Air bag warning light 3-42

Curtain air bag 3-53

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger's seat……3-41

Driver's and passenger's front air bag 3-46

Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator ....3-43

Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch 3-49

Side impact air bag....3-51

Air cleaner 7-20

Air conditioner compressor label 8-10

Alarm system 4-11

Antenna 4-112

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-31

Appearance care 7-62

Exterior care 7-62

Interior care 7-67

Armrest 3-5, 3-14

Ashtray 4-105

Audio system 4-112

Antenna 4-112

Aux, USB and iPod 4-108

Audio remote control 4-113

Automatic climate control system 4-91

Air conditioning 4-87, 4-97

Automatic heating and air conditioning....4-92

Manual heating and air conditioning 4-93

Automatic transaxle 5-22

Shift lock system 5-25

B

Battery 7-26

Battery saver function 4-70

Before driving 5-3

Bonnet 4-24

Bottle holders, see cup holders 4-106

Brake/clutch fluid 7-16

Brake system 5-28

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-31

Electronic stability control (ESC) 5-33

Hill-start assist control (HAC) 5-36

Parking brake 5-29

Power brakes 5-28

Bulb replacement 7-52

Front fog light bulb replacement 7-56

Headlight bulb replacement 7-53

High mounted stop light replacement....7-60

Interior light bulb replacement 7-61

License plate light bulb replacement 7-60

Position light bulb replacement 7-55

Rear combination light bulb replacement 7-57

Rear fog light bulb replacement 7-60

Index

Side repeater light bulb replacement....7-56

Smart cornering light bulb replacement....7-54

Turn signal light bulb replacement 7-55

Bulb wattage 8-3

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button....5-9

C

Capacities (Lubricants) 8-6

Care

Exterior care 7-62

Interior care 7-67

Tyre care 7-31

Central door lock/unlock switch 4-14

Centre console storage 4-102

Changing tyres 6-10

Chains

Tyre chains 5-54

Checking tyre inflation pressure 7-31

Child restraint system 3-28

Tether anchor system 3-33

ISOFIX system 3-34

Child-protector rear door lock 4-16

Cigarette lighter 4-105

Climate control system (Automatic) 4-91

Air conditioning 4-97

Automatic heating and air conditioning 4-92

Climate control air filter 4-98, 7-21

Manual heating and air conditioning 4-93

Climate control system (Manual) 4-82

Air conditioning 4-87

Climate control air filter 4-89

Heating and air conditioning 4-83

Clock (Digital) 4-104

Clothes hanger 4-109

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster 4-40

Cool box 4-102

Coolant 7-13

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant 7-13

Crankcase emission control system 7-70

Cruise control system 5-38

Cup holder 4-106

Curtain air bag 3-53

D

Dashboard, see instrument cluster 4-40

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-41

Daytime running light 4-74

Declaration of conformity....8-11

Defogging (Windscreen) 4-99

Defroster 4-81

Outside mirror defroster 4-81

Rear window defroster 4-81

Windscreen deicer 4-81

Index

Defrosting (Windscreen) 4-99

Digital clock 4-104

Dimensions 8-2

Displays, see instrument cluster 4-40

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-41

Door locks 4-13

Central door lock/unlock switch 4-14

Child-protector rear door lock 4-16

Drinks holders, see cup holders 4-106

Driver's air bag 3-46

Driving at night 5-49

Driving in flooded areas 5-51

Driving in the rain 5-50

E

Economical operation 5-45

EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack 6-17

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) 4-35

Electric power steering 4-33

Electronic stability control (ESC) 5-33

Emergency starting 6-5

Jump starting 6-5

Push starting 6-7

Emergency tailgate safety release 4-18

Emergency towing 6-41

Emergency whilst driving 6-3

Emission control system 7-70

Crankcase emission control system 7-70

Evaporative emission control system 7-70

Exhaust emission control system 7-71

Engine 8-2

Engine compartment 2-4, 7-2

Engine coolant 7-13

Engine number 8-10

Engine oil 7-11

Engine overheats 6-8

Engine start/stop button 5-9

Engine temperature gauge 4-42

Engine will not start 6-4

Evaporative emission control system 7-70

Exhaust emission control system 7-71

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-8

Exterior care 7-62

F

Flat tyre 6-9

Changing tyres 6-10

EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack....6-17

Jack and tools 6-9

Jack label 6-16

Removing and storing the spare tyre 6-10

Flat tyre (with TyreMobilityKit) 6-18, 6-24

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-109

Fluid

Brake/clutch fluid 7-16

Washer fluid 7-18

Folding the rear seat 3-11

Front fog light 4-74

Front fog light bulb replacement 7-56

Front seat adjustment 3-4

Fuel filler lid 4-26

Fuel filter(for diesel) 7-19

Fuel gauge 4-43

Fuel requirements 1-3

Fuses 7-41

Fuse/relay panel description 7-45

Main fuse 7-44

Memory fuse 7-43

Multi fuse 7-41

G

Gauges 4-41

Engine temperature gauge 4-42

Fuel gauge 4-43

Glassroof, see panorama sunroof 4-29

Glove box 4-102

Glove box cooling 4-102

H

Hazard warning flasher 4-69, 6-2

Hazardous driving conditions 5-47

Headlight bulb replacement 7-53

Headlight escort function 4-70

Headlight levelling device 4-75

Head restraint 3-6, 3-13

Heating and air conditioning 4-83

High mounted stop light replacement 7-60

Highway driving 5-51

Hill-start assist control (HAC) 5-36

Horn 4-35

How to use this manual 1-2

|

Immobiliser system 4-3

Indicators and warnings 4-48

Instrument cluster 4-40

Engine temperature gauge 4-42

Fuel gauge 4-43

Instrument panel illumination 4-41

LCD display 4-59

Odometer 4-44

Speedometer 4-41

Tachometer 4-42

Tripmeter 4-45

Index

Trip computer 4-45

Warning and indicators 4-48

Instrument panel illumination 4-41

Instrument panel overview 2-3

Interior care 7-67

Interior features 4-104

Ashtray 4-105

Cigarette lighter 4-105

Clothes hanger 4-109

Cup holder 4-106

Digital clock 4-104

Aux, USB and iPod 4-108

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-109

Luggage net (holder) 4-110

Luggage board 4-110

Outside temperature 4-104

Power outlet 4-107

Shopping bag holder 4-108

Sunvisor 4-106

Interior light 4-80

Luggage room lamp 4-18

Map lamp 4-80

Room lamp 4-80

Vanity mirror lamp 4-80

Interior light bulb replacement 7-61

Interior overview 2-2

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system 5-15

ISOFIX system 3-34

J

Jack and tools 6-9

Jack label 6-16

Jump starting 6-5

K

Key positions 5-4

Keys 4-2

L

Label

Air bag warning label 3-61

Tyre sidewall labeling 7-36

Tyre specification and pressure label 8-10

Vehicle certification label 8-9

Latch system, see ISOFIX system 3-34

License plate light bulb replacement 7-60

Light bulbs 7-52

Front fog light bulb replacement 7-56

Headlight bulb replacement 7-53

High mounted stop light replacement 7-60

Interior light bulb replacement 7-61

License plate light bulb replacement 7-60

Position light bulb replacement 7-55

Rear combination light bulb replacement 7-57

Rear fog light bulb replacement....7-60

Side repeater light bulb replacement 7-56

Smart cornering light bulb replacement....7-54

Turn signal light bulb replacement 7-55

Lighting 4-70

Battery saver function 4-70

Daytime running light 4-74

Front fog light 4-74

Headlight escort function 4-70

Headlight levelling device 4-75

Lighting control 4-71

Rear fog light 4-74

Smart cornering light 4-70

Turn signals and lane change signals 4-73

Load and speed capacity tyres 8-5

Lubricants and capacities 8-6

Luggage boad 4-110

Luggage net (holder) 4-110

Luggage room lamp 4-18

M

Main fuse 7-44

Maintenance Explanation of scheduled maintenance items……7-8

Maintenance services 7-3

Owner maintenance 7-5

Scheduled maintenance service 7-7

Tyre maintenance 7-36

Maintenance services 7-3

Manual climate control system 4-82

Air conditioning 4-87

Climate control air filter 4-89

Heating and air conditioning 4-83

Manual heating and air conditioning 4-93

Manual transaxle 5-19

Map lamp 4-79

Memory fuse 7-43

Mirrors 4-36

Day/night rearview mirror 4-36

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) 4-36

Inside rearview mirror 4-36

Outside rearview mirror 4-37

Moonroof, see panorama sunroof 4-29

Multi fuse 7-41

Index

N

Neck restraints, see head restraint 3-6, 3-13

0

Odometer 4-44

Oil (Engine) 7-11

Outside mirror defroster 4-81

Outside temperature 4-104

Outside rearview mirror 4-37

Overheats 6-8

Owner maintenance 7-5

P

Panorama sunroof 4-29

Parking brake 5-28

Parking brake inspect 7-18

Passenger's front air bag 3-46

Position light bulb replacement 7-55

Power brakes 5-28

Power outlet 4-107

Power window lock switch 4-22

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-22

Push starting 6-7

R

Rear combination light bulb replacement 7-57

Rear fog light 4-74

Rear fog light bulb replacement 7-59

Rear seat adjustment 3-10

Rear parking assist system 4-64

Rear window defroster 4-81

Rearview camera 4-68

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures 7-30

Recommended lubricants and capacities 8-6

Recommended SAE viscosity number 8-8

Refrigerant label 8-11

Remote keyless entry 4-5

Returning used vehicles (for Europe)....1-6

Road warning 6-2

Rocking the vehicle 5-48

Room lamp 4-80

S

Scheduled maintenance service 7-7

Seat 3-2

Armrest 3-5, 3-14

Folding the rear seat 3-11

Front seat adjustment 3-4

Head restraint 3-6, 3-13

Rear seat adjustment 3-10

Index

Seatback pocket 3-10
Seat warmer 3-9
Seat belts 3-15
Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-22
Lap/shoulder belt 3-17
3 point rear centre belt 3-20
Seat belt warning 3-16
Seat warmer 3-9
Seatback pocket 3-10
Shift lock system 5-25
Shopping bag holder 4-108
Side impact air bag 3-51
Side repeater light bulb replacement 7-56
Smart cornering light 4-70
Smart key 4-8
Smooth cornering 5-49
Snow tyres 5-53
Spare tyre Removing and storing the spare tyre 6-10
Use of compact spare tyre 6-14
Special driving conditions 5-47
Driving at night 5-49
Driving in flooded areas 5-51
Driving in the rain 5-50
Hazardous driving conditions 5-47
Highway driving 5-51
Rocking the vehicle 5-48
Smooth cornering 5-49

Speed limit control system 5-43
Speedometer 4-41
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start 6-4
Starting the engine 5-5, 5-12
Steering wheel 4-33
Electric power steering 4-33
Horn 4-35
Tilt steering 4-33
Storage compartment 4-101
Centre console storage 4-102
Cool box 4-102
Glovc box 4-102
Luggage box 4-103
Sunglass holder 4-103
Sunroof, see panorama sunroof 4-29
Sunvisor 4-107

T

Tachometer 4-42
Tailgate 4-17
Emergency tailgate safety release 4-18
Tether anchor system 3-33
Theft-alarm system 4-11
Tie-down hook 6-43
Tilt steering 4-33
Towing 6-39
Emergency towing 6-41

Index

Removable towing hook 6-40

Trailer towing 5-57

Transaxle

Automatic transaxlc 5-22

Manual transaxle 5-19

Tripmeter 4-45

Trip computer 4-45

Turn signals and lane change signals 4-73

Turn signal light bulb replacement 7-55

Tyre chains 5-54

TyreMobilityKit 6-18, 6-24

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....6-29, 6-34

Tyre specification and pressure label 8-10

Tyres and wheels 7-30, 8-4

Checking tyre inflation pressure 7-31

Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures 7-30

Tyre care 7-30

Tyre maintenance 7-36

Tyre replacement 7-34

Tyre rotation 7-32

Tyre sidewall labeling 7-36

Tyre traction 7-36

Wheel alignment and tyre balance 7-33

Wheel replacement 7-35

V

Vanity mirror lamp 4-80

Vehicle run-in process 1-6

Vehicle certification label 8-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8-9

Vehicle weight 5-65, 8-5

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-65

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-65

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-65

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-65

Payload 5-65

Vehicle kerb weight 5-65

W

Washer fluid 7-19

Waste tray, see ashtray 4-105

Warnings and indicators 4-48

Weight and Volume 8-5

Wheel alignment and tyre balance 7-33

Wheel replacement 7-35

Windows 4-19

Auto down window 4-21

Auto up/down window 4-21

Power window lock switch 4-22

Windscreen defrosting and defogging 4-99

Windscreen deicer 4-81

Index

Winter driving 5-53

Snow tyres 5-53

Tyre chains 5-54

Wiper blades 7-23

Wipers and washers 4-76